Official Software
Get notified when we add a new LexusOther Model Manual

We cover 38 Lexus vehicles, were you looking for one of these?

Lexus - LS 460 - Workshop Manual - (2007)
Lexus - GS 300 - Workshop Manual - (1993)
Lexus - GS 350 - Workshop Manual - (2007)
Lexus - LS 400 - Workshop Manual - (1990)
Lexus - LS 460 - Workshop Manual - (2009)
Lexus - SC 430 - Workshop Manual - (2003)
Lexus - GS 300 - Workshop Manual - (2004)
Lexus - GS 450 - Workshop Manual - (2007)
Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2008_IS_350_250-mk-OM53650U
Lexus - GS 350 - Wiring Diagram - (2009)
Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2008_IS_350_250-mk-OM53650U_5d8a7fb2205698a85417799
Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2008_IS_F-mk-OM53714U
Lexus - SC 400 - Workshop Manual - (1997)
Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2011_IS_F-mk-OM53893U
Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2009_IS_F-mk-OM53700U
Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2012_IS_F-mk-OM53A41U
Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2008_IS_F-mk-OM53613U_5d8a7fb2c2cfd1a40044054
Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2010_IS_F-mk-OM53A25U_5d8a7f7210dd69a35589660
Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2014_IS_F-mk-OM53C33U_5d8a7f721ad2a8a05142317
Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2010_IS_F-mk-OM53A25U
Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2013_IS_F-mk-OM53B49U
Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2009_IS_F-mk-OM53700U_5d8a7f869d7b95a96244745
Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2009_IS_F-mk-OM53706U_5d8a7f8892bd82a93490888
Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2012_IS_F-mk-OM53A41U_5d8a7fb2bf9a84a89164869
Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2014_IS_F-mk-OM53C15U
Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2014_IS_F-mk-OM53C15U_5d8a7f840dfc50a73415738
Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2014_IS_F-mk-OM53C33U
Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2008_IS_F-mk-OM53714U_5d8a7fb221eaf2a24629815
Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2011_IS_F-mk-OM53A11U_5d8a7f733c8fe6a02660009
Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2010_IS_F-mk-OM53791U_5d8a7f6645bde2a08742526
Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2008_IS_F-mk-OM53613U
Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2011_IS_F-mk-OM53A11U
Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2010_IS_F-mk-OM53791U
Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2009_IS_F-mk-OM53706U
Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2011_IS_F-mk-OM53893U_5d8a7f625f6623a15657710
Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2013_IS_F-mk-OM53B49U_5d8a7f77b34583a28557958
Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2013_IS_F-mk-OM53B59U
Lexus - Auto - Lexus_2013_IS_F-mk-OM53B59U_5d8a7f87562bc8a15409052
Summary of Content
GAS STATION INFORMATION D Fuel selection: Select unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. For improved vehicle performance, the use of premium unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher is recommended. D Fuel tank capacity: 70 L (18.5 gal., 15.4 lmp. gal.) D Engine oil: “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent Oil grade: API grade SL “Energy−Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil Recommended oil viscosity: SAE 5W−30 Oil capacity: L (qt., lmp. qt.) Drain and refill With filter 4.7 (5.0, 4.1) Without filter 4.5 (4.8, 4.0) See page 312 for detailed information. D Engine coolant: Capacity: 9.2 L (9.7 qt., 8.2 lmp. qt.) Coolant type − “Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” or equivalent With ethylene−glycol type coolant for a proper corrosion protection of aluminum components Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or plain water alone. For checking the engine coolant, see page 315. D Automatic transaxle: Fluid type − Toyota Genuine ATF Type T−IV See page 319 for detailed information. D Tire information: See pages 324 through 331 for detailed information. D Tire pressure: Tire size: P215/60R16 94V Tire pressure: Front 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2 or bar, 29 psi) Rear 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2 or bar, 29 psi) For sustained high speeds above 160 km/h (99 mph), in countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 40 kPa (0.4 kgf/cm2 or bar, 6 psi) to the front tires and rear tires, but never exceed the maximum cold tire pressure molded on the tire sidewall. FOREWORD Congratulations on your selection of this Lexus. In Lexus vehicles we have invested all our engineering and design resources; all the know−how we have gained in over 60 years of making automobiles; the highest motivation of our most talented employees; and our tradition of incessant striving toward ever greater quality. This Owner’s Manual explains the features of your new Lexus. Please read it and follow the instructions carefully so that you can enjoy many years of safe motoring. When it comes to service, remember that your Lexus dealer knows your vehicle best and is interested in your complete satisfaction. Your Lexus dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require. If there is not a Lexus dealer near you, or you need emergency assistance for any reason, please call the following number: U.S. OWNERS D When traveling in the U.S. mainland or Canada: Lexus Roadside Assistance 1−800−25−LEXUS (Toll−Free) (1−800−255−3987) D HAWAII: Lexus Customer Service Assistance 1−800−25−LEXUS (Toll−Free) (1−800−255−3987) CANADIAN OWNERS D When traveling in Canada or the U.S. mainland: Lexus Roadside Assistance/Customer Service 1−800−26−LEXUS (Toll−Free) (1−800−265−3987) Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also. All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice. Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle. i INTRODUCTION New vehicle warranty Your new vehicle is covered by the following Lexus limited warranties: D New vehicle warranty D Emission control systems warranty D Others Spark ignition system of your Lexus For further information, please refer to the “Owner’s Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”. The spark ignition system in your Lexus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference−Causing Equipment Standard. Your responsibility for maintenance It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure the specified maintenance is performed. Section 5 of this Owner’s Manual gives details of these maintenance requirements. Included in Section 6 is general maintenance. For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”. Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus A wide variety of non−genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Lexus vehicle. ii This vehicle should not be modified with non−genuine Lexus products. Modification with non−genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty. Installation of a mobile two−way radio system As the installation of a mobile two−way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as the multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, cruise control system, anti−lock brake system, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation. Scrapping of your Lexus The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL The contents of this manual are explained briefly on this page to help you make the best use of the manual. Please read this page and the rest of the Owner’s Manual carefully to make sure you fully understand the operation of your vehicle. SECTION 2 − AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO The features of the vehicle’s air conditioning and audio are explained in detail. Be sure to read this section so that you can make full use of them. SECTION 3 − STARTING AND DRIVING TABLE OF CONTENTS Starting the engine, driving, stopping, operation of features affecting vehicle handling, hints on vehicle safety and safe driving techniques are all explained. Please read everything in this section, and remember − drive safely! The table of contents and the pictorial index provide easy reference to the appropriate pages. SECTION 4 − IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY This will help you enjoy safe and comfortable driving. Operation of basic equipment is briefly explained in an easily understandable way for quick reference. This section explains what to do in the event of an urgent situation such as the engine not starting or getting a flat tire, etc. If such a problem occurs, check the contents of this Owner’s Manual and follow the instructions given. SECTION 1 − INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS SECTION 5 − MAINTENANCE BASIC OPERATION − QUICK REFERENCE The vehicle’s equipment is divided into the 7 groups listed below. Use of the equipment is explained, including any points you should pay particular attention to. This section explains the importance of regular maintenance. Regular and periodic inspection and maintenance of your Lexus will help to keep your vehicle in its best condition. 1. Keys and doors SECTION 6 − SERVICE PROCEDURES AND SPECIFICATIONS 2. Switches 3. Gauges, meters and service reminder indicators 4. Interior equipment Simple maintenance procedure and service data are provided here for your reference should you wish to perform inspection and maintenance yourself. 5. Exterior equipment 6. Comfort adjustment 7. Theft deterrent iii HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL INDEX Safety and vehicle damage warnings The page number is listed for each item in the Owner’s Manual so that you can rapidly find the item and page you are searching for. In this manual you will see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings. These are used in the following ways: GAS STATION INFORMATION The information you need to know for appropriate servicing at the gas station is provided here. QUICK INDEX This is designed so that you can quickly find the needed information when an urgent situation arises. Safety symbol CAUTION This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others. NOTICE This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Lexus and its equipment. Your Lexus Owner ’s Manual provides you with a considerable amount of information. To use this information most effectively, please take the time to familiarize yourself with the contents and use of the manual. In this manual, you will also see a circle with a slash through it. This means “Do not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”. iv PICTORIAL INDEX INSTRUMENT PANEL v PICTORIAL INDEX Page Page 16 Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 17 Automatic air conditioning controls . . . . . . . . . . 160 18 Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 1 Door lock switch and power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 40 2 Driving position memory switches . . . . . . . . . . . 152 3 Power rear view mirror control switches . . . . . . 102 4 Side vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 19 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 5 Instrument panel light control dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 20 Automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . . 227 6 Headlight, turn signal and fog light switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 30, 33, 34 21 Rear electric sunshade switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 22 Electronic modulated suspension control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 23 Traction control system off switch . . . . . . . . . . . 238 24 Cruise control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 25 Power adjustable pedals switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 26 Parking brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 27 Auxiliary box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 28 Hood lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 29 Trunk lid opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 30 Fuel filler door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 7 Multi−information display control switches . . . . 59 8 Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 9 Wiper and washer switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 10 Seat heater switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 11 Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 12 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 13 Car audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 196 14 Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . 53 15 Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 156 For detailed information, refer to the description given in each section. vi PICTORIAL INDEX INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (vehicles sold in U. S. A.) vii PICTORIAL INDEX Page Page Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 1 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 14 2 Traction control system off indicator light . . . . 238 15 Trip meter reset knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 3 Vehicle skid control system/traction control system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 16 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 17 Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 4 Headlight indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 18 Low engine oil level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 5 Headlight high beam indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . 33 19 Multi−information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 6 Turn signal indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 20 Rear light failure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 7 Fog light indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 21 Low engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . 54 8 Cruise control indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 22 Brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 9 Slip indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238, 240 23 Anti−lock brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . 55 10 Automatic headlight leveling system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 24 Driver’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 25 Discharge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 11 Low fuel level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 26 SRS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 12 Automatic transmission indicator lights . . . . . . 227 27 Open door warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 13 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 28 Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 For detailed information, refer to the description given in each section. viii PICTORIAL INDEX INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (vehicles sold in Canada) ix PICTORIAL INDEX Page Page Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 1 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 14 2 Traction control system off indicator light . . . . 238 15 Trip meter reset knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 3 Vehicle skid control system/traction control system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 16 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 17 Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 4 Tail light indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 18 Low engine oil level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 5 Headlight high beam indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . 33 19 Multi−information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 6 Turn signal indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 20 Rear light failure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 7 Fog light indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 21 Low engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . 54 8 Cruise control indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 22 Brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 9 Slip indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238, 240 23 Anti−lock brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . 55 10 Automatic headlight leveling system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 24 Driver’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 25 Discharge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 11 Low fuel level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 26 SRS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 12 Automatic transmission indicator lights . . . . . . 227 27 Open door warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 13 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 28 Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 For detailed information, refer to the description given in each section. x PICTORIAL INDEX SEAT AND STEERING WHEEL Page 1 Tilt steering lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 2 Seat position, seat cushion angle and height control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 96 3 Seatback angle control switch . . . 96 4 Lumbar support control switch . . 97 For detailed information, refer to the description given in each section. xi PICTORIAL INDEX EXTERIOR VIEW Page 1 Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . . 39 2 Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 3 Tire and wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 4 Moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 5 Outside rear view mirror . . . . . . . 101 6 Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 7 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 8 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 30, 350 9 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 10 Wiper and washer . . . . . . . . . . 34, 348 For detailed information, refer to the description given in each section. xii PICTORIAL INDEX xiii BASIC OPERATION QUICK REFERENCE Quick reference Driver’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tilt steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power adjustable pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiper switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 3 4 5 6 1 QUICK REFERENCE 1. DRIVER’S SEAT 2. TILT STEERING WHEEL Seat position Seat cushion angle Seat cushion height Seatback angle Lumbar support Head restraint height Head restraint angle 2 To tilt the steering wheel up or down to the desired angle: 1. Pull the lever up while holding the steering wheel. 2. Tilt the steering wheel to the desired angle. 3. Release the lever. QUICK REFERENCE 3. POWER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS To adjust the position of the accelerator and brake pedals: 1. Set the parking brake firmly. 2. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” position with the automatic transmission selector lever in the “P” position. 3. Push the “ ” side of the switch to move the pedals to the front most position. 4. Push the “ ” side of the switch to move the pedals toward you until you can fully depress the brake pedal. 5. After adjusting, depress the pedals a few times to get used to the feel. 3 QUICK REFERENCE 4. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION OF SELECTOR LEVER BE056 SELECTOR LEVER POSITION P: Parking, engine starting and key removal position BE057 R: Reverse position N: Neutral position D: Normal driving position (shifting into overdrive possible) 4: Position for engine braking (shifting into overdrive not possible) 3, 2: Position for more powerful engine braking L: Position for maximum engine braking K Shift while pressing the brake pedal. (Ignition switch must be in the “ON” position.) NOTE: When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift from “D” to “4”, engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. For the operation to decrease the vehicle speed, see page 236. 4 QUICK REFERENCE 5. HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH D HEADLIGHT SWITCH (U.S.A.) With the ignition OFF D HEADLIGHT SWITCH (Canada) With the ignition OFF Parking, tail, license plate, side marker and instrument panel lights turn on. BE004 Parking, tail, license plate, side marker and instrument panel lights turn on. Headlights also turn on. Headlights also turn on. Automatic light control With the engine started and parking brake released Automatic light control Parking, tail, license plate, side marker and instrument panel lights turn on. Headlights turn on at full intensity. With the engine started and parking brake released Parking, tail, license plate, side marker and instrument panel lights turn on. Headlights turn on at full intensity. BE004 Automatic light control Daytime running light system off 5 QUICK REFERENCE D HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH High beam Headlight flasher 6. WIPER SWITCH Intermittent operational type Intermittent operation D TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Low speed operation Right or left turn High speed operation Lane change (right or left) Washer on 6 QUICK REFERENCE Raindrop detection type Automatic operation Low speed operation High speed operation Washer on 7 QUICK REFERENCE 8 SECTION 1–1 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Keys and doors Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine immobiliser system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wireless remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 14 15 22 9 KEYS AND DOORS KEYS To protect items locked in the trunk or glove box when using valet parking, leave the sub key with the attendant. The trunk lid can be opened using a loop of wire in the trunk even with the trunk lid opener main switch in the glove box turned off. When keeping items in the trunk, be sure to turn off the trunk lid opener main switch and lock the glove box and rear armrest door. To turn off the main switch in the glove box, see page 85. For locking the glove box, see page 70. For locking the rear armrest door, see page 99. Since the doors can be locked without a key, you should always carry the flat key or spare master key in case you accidentally lock your keys inside the vehicle. 1 Master keys (black) − These keys work in every lock. For your Lexus dealer to make you a new key with built−in transponder chip, your dealer will need it. 2 Sub key (gray) − This key will not open the glove box and rear armrest door in the rear seat. 3 Key number plate − Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. A transponder chip for engine immobiliser system has been placed in the head of the master and sub keys. These chips are needed to enable the system to function correctly, so be careful not to lose these keys. If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to cancel the system or start the engine. 10 If you should lose your keys or if you need additional keys, duplicates can be made by a Lexus dealer using the key number. We recommend writing down the key number and storing it in a safe place. KEYS AND DOORS Flat key Starting the engine using a flat key As a transponder chip is built in its key case, you can start the engine with this key. 1. Remove the key plate from the key case. The flat key works in every lock. A transponder chip for engine immobiliser system has been placed in the key case of the flat key. This chip is needed to enable the system to function correctly, so be careful not to lose this key. If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to cancel the system or start the engine. Insert your key plate in its key case as shown. We recommend that you always carry this with you for emergency use. Do not leave it in your vehicle. 2. Insert the key plate into the ignition switch. The indicator light keeps flashing. 3. Bring the key case closer to the ignition switch within 10 seconds as indicated by the arrow head. The indicator light goes out. This means the engine immobiliser system is automatically canceled. (For details, see “Engine immobiliser system” on page 14.) You can put the key case away then. You cannot cancel the engine immobiliser system if 10 seconds have past after you inserted the key plate. You need to remove the key plate from the ignition switch and try it again from the step 2. 4. Start the engine within 20 seconds after the security indicator light goes out. You cannot start the engine if 20 seconds have past after the security indicator went off. You need to remove the key plate from the ignition switch and try it again from the step 2. 11 KEYS AND DOORS NOTICE D Do not let the key case become bent as the key plate may fall out or become bent also. D The flat key is designed for emergency use only. So do not use it regularly instead of other master keys. When using a key containing a transponder chip, observe the following precautions: D When starting the engine, do not use the key with a key ring resting on the key grip and do not press the key ring against the key grip. Doing so may prevent the engine from starting, or may cause the engine to stop soon after it starts. 12 KEYS AND DOORS D When starting the engine, do not use the key in proximity with other transponder keys (including the flat key and keys of other vehicles), and do not press other key plates against the key grip. Doing so may prevent the engine from starting, or may cause the engine to stop soon after it starts. If this happens, remove the key once and then insert it again after taking off other transponder keys (including the flat key and keys of other vehicles) from the ring or while gripping or covering them with your hand to start the engine. D Do not bend the key grip or flat key. D Do not cover the key grip or flat key with any material that cuts off electromagnetic waves. D Do not knock the key or flat key hard against other objects. D Do not leave the key or flat key exposed to high temperatures for a long period, such as on the dashboard and hood under the direct sunlight. D Do not put the key or flat key in water or wash it in an ultrasonic washer. D Do not use the key or flat key with electromagnetic materials. 13 KEYS AND DOORS ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM For your Lexus dealer to make you a new key with built−in transponder chip, your dealer will need your key number and master key. However, there is a limit to the number of additional keys your Lexus dealer can make for you. If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to cancel the system or start the engine. For vehicles sold in U.S.A. FCC ID: MOZRI−16BTY−B MADE IN JAPAN The engine immobiliser system is a theft prevention system. When you insert the key in the ignition switch, the transponder chip in the key’s head transmits an electronic code to the vehicle. The engine will start, only when the electronic code in the chip corresponds to the registered ID code for the vehicle. The system is automatically set when the key is removed from the ignition switch. At this time, the security indicator light flashes. When you insert the key in the ignition switch, the security indicator light goes out and the system is canceled automatically, which enables the engine to start. 14 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. KEYS AND DOORS For vehicles sold in Canada WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL This device complies with RSS−210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 1 Locking the doors and sounding an alarm 2 Indicator light 3 Unlocking the trunk lid 4 Unlocking the doors When you operate any button on the key, push it slowly and surely. At this time, the indicator light on the key grip flashes once. The operational range of the wireless remote control is approximately 1 meter (3 ft.). The effective range may vary with different conditions. To activate the wireless remote control without fail, do it approximately 1 meter (3 ft.) from your Lexus. 15 KEYS AND DOORS In the following cases, the battery in the key may be discharged. If this is a case, replace it using a special screwdriver. D The remote control does not work. D The operational range of wireless remote control becomes extremely short. D The indicator light on the key is dimmed or does not come on. For the replacement of the battery, see “Replacing the battery” on page 20. You can also have the battery of the key replaced by your Lexus dealer. If you lose the wireless key, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to avoid the possibility of theft, or an accident. (See “If you lose your keys or lock yourself out” on page 285.) You can use up to 4 wireless remote control keys for the same vehicle. Contact your Lexus dealer for detailed information. When you push the “LOCK” button on the key briefly, all the doors can be locked from outside the vehicle. At this time, one beep sounds and the turn signal lights flash once.* However, when you push the “LOCK” button with any door not closed securely, the buzzer sounds for 10 seconds.** To stop the buzzer, close all the doors securely or push the “UNLOCK” button. If the key is in the ignition switch, locking cannot be done. Make sure all the doors are locked when you leave the vehicle. Push the “LOCK” button once again. NOTE: * The turn signal lights can be set not to flash and the beep volume can be changed. ** The buzzer can be set not to sound if a door is not closed securely. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. The wireless remote control key is an electronic component. Observe the following instructions in order not to cause damage to the key. NOTICE D Do not leave the wireless remote control key on places where the temperature becomes high such as on the dashboard. Do not push the “LOCK” button any longer than 2 to 3 seconds. Pushing the button longer activates an alarm. For details, see page 18. D Do not disassemble it. D Avoid knocking it hard against other objects or dropping it. D Avoid putting it in water. 16 Locking/Unlocking the doors KEYS AND DOORS When you push the “UNLOCK” button, the driver’s door is unlocked. Pushing that button once again within 3 seconds from the first push, all other doors are also unlocked.* NOTE: * The 2−step unlocking function can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. At this time, two beeps sound and the turn signal lights flash twice.* Together with the activation of unlocking, the interior light comes on for 15 seconds if the interior light switch is in “DOOR” position.** However, this function does not work when the ignition key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position. For further information, see “Illuminated entry system” on page 66. You have 30 seconds to open a door after using the wireless remote unlock feature.*** If a door is not opened by then, all the doors will be automatically locked again. Even if the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” button is kept pressed in, the locking or unlocking operation is not repeated. Release the button and then push again. " 1 Off 2 Louder When you push any button on the key, the vehicle sounds one beep when the doors are locked by remote control, and sounds two beeps when the doors are unlocked. You can adjust the beep loudness with the knob under the instrument panel. Turning the knob clockwise increases the volume and turning it counterclockwise until it stops turns the buzzer off. NOTE: * The turn signal lights can be set not to flash and the beep volume can be changed. ** The duration of lighting can be changed *** The time before automatic re−locking can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. 17 KEYS AND DOORS Unlocking the trunk lid Sounding an alarm* When you keep the button pushed for about 1 second, you can unlock the trunk lid.* One beep sounds. When you push the “PANIC” button for about 2 to 3 seconds, an alarm sounds to deter any person trying to break into or damage your vehicle. This function does not work when the ignition key is in the “ON” position. NOTE: * The operation method can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. 18 If you want to stop the alarm, push any button. This function does not work when the ignition key is in the “ON” position. NOTE: * The alarm can be set not to sound. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. KEYS AND DOORS Operating the side windows and moon roof The side windows and moon roof can be opened using a wireless key from outside the vehicle.* NOTE: * The windows and moon roof can be deactivated. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. For vehicles sold in U.S.A. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTICE: Push the “UNLOCK” button until the windows and moon roof start to move. When you release the button, the windows and moon roof stop operating. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: D Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 19 KEYS AND DOORS D Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. D Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. D Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 20 Replacing the battery When you replace the battery, prepare a lithium battery CR1616 or equivalent and a special screwdriver. CAUTION Special care should be taken that small children do not swallow the removed battery or components. NOTICE D When replacing the battery, be careful not to lose the components. D Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Lexus dealer. D Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws. KEYS AND DOORS 1. Remove the screw, and then the cover while pushing it in the arrow direction. 3. Remove the 2 screws to take out the lid of the module. 4. Take out the discharged battery and put a new battery with the positive side up. NOTICE D Make sure the positive side and negative side of the battery should be faced correctly. D Do not replace the battery with wet hands. Water may cause unexpected rust. D Do not touch or move any components inside of the transmitter, or it may interfere with proper operation. 2. Remove the module from the key frame. D Be careful not to bend the electrode of the battery insertion and that dust or oils do not adhere to the inside of the module. D Take care not to lose the screws. 21 KEYS AND DOORS 5. Install the lid with the 2 screws. 6. Install the module into the key frame and secure the cover with the screw. DOORS Locking with key 7. When pushing any button on the wireless key, make sure the indicator light comes on. " 1 Lock 2 Unlock Turn the key towards the front of the vehicle to lock and towards the back to unlock. The doors lock and unlock simultaneously with the driver’s door. Turning the key once will unlock the driver’s door and twice in succession will unlock all doors simultaneously.* NOTE: * The 2−step unlocking function can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. If a wrong key is used, the key cylinder rotates freely to isolate inside mechanism. So, door locking is protected from thieves. The windows and moon roof can be opened from outside the vehicle using the key. For details, see page 42 and page 91. 22 KEYS AND DOORS Locking with inside lock button Closing the door with the lock button pushed in will also lock the door. Be careful not to lock your keys in the vehicle. Doors cannot be locked when either front door is open and the key is in the ignition. If the vehicle is subjected to a severe frontal, rear or side impact with the ignition switch turned to the “ON” position, all doors will unlock automatically after a few seconds. CAUTION " 1 Lock 2 Unlock Push in the lock button to lock and unlock the door. The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handles even if the lock buttons are in the locked position. Before driving, make sure the doors are closed and locked, especially when small children are in the vehicle. Along with the proper use of seat belts, locking the doors helps prevent the driver and passengers from being thrown out from the vehicle during an accident. It also helps prevent the doors from being opened unintentionally. CAUTION Do not pull the inside handle of the front doors while driving. The doors will open and an accident may occur. Lexus strongly recommends that all children be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle. 23 KEYS AND DOORS Locking with power door lock switch If you do any of the following, no door can be unlocked with the power door lock switch. D Lock all the doors with the key or wireless remote control when all the doors are closed. D Open the driver’s door or front passenger’s door and move the inside lock buttons of both front doors to the lock position, then close the front doors. The power door lock switch can be reset in the following ways. D Turn the ignition key to the “ON” position. D Unlock all the doors with the key or wireless remote control. " 1 Lock 2 Unlock To lock all the doors simultaneously, push the power door lock switch down on the front side. Pushing down on the rear side will unlock them. The same switch is also located on the front passenger’s side. 24 D Unlock the driver’s door or front passenger’s door with the inside lock button, and then unlock all the doors with the power door lock switch. KEYS AND DOORS Setting the auto door locking and unlocking functions Setting the functions You can set the following auto door locking and unlocking functions. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position. 1. Close all the doors. (a) Locking linked with the shift position 3. Within 10 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position; All the doors are locked automatically when the selector lever is moved out of the “P” position with the ignition switch in the “ON” position.* D To set function (a) Push and hold the front of the power door lock switch for 5 seconds with the selector lever in the “P” position. NOTE: * This function is the default setting for new vehicles. (b) Unlocking linked with the shift position D To set function (b) Push and hold the rear of the power door lock switch for 5 seconds with the selector lever in the “P” position. All the doors are unlocked automatically when the selector lever is moved to the “P” position with the ignition switch in the “ON” position. D To set function (c) Push and hold the front of the power door lock switch for 5 seconds with the selector lever in any position except “P”. (c) Locking linked with the vehicle speed D To set function (d) Push and hold the rear of the power door lock switch for 5 seconds with the selector lever in any position except “P”. All the doors are locked automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 20 km/h (12 mph) or higher. However, if any door is unlocked during driving, this auto locking function will not operate until the unlocked door is opened once. (d) Unlocking linked with opening the driver’s door All the doors are unlocked automatically when the driver’s door is opened within 10 seconds after the ignition switch is turned from “ON” to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. All the doors are automatically lock and unlock when you release the power door lock switch. This indicates that the function is set. If all the doors do not lock and unlock, the time the switch was held may have been too short or too long. Perform the procedure over again starting from step 1. If you want to cancel a function, repeat the procedure. Each time you perform the procedure, the function is set or cancelled. 25 KEYS AND DOORS Locking with rear door child−protector " 1 Unlock 2 Lock Whenever small children are in the vehicle, lock the rear door so that it does not open from the inside. To do this, move the lever to the lock position as shown on the label next to the lever. 26 SECTION 1–2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Switches Headlight switch (U.S.A.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlight switch (Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlight dimmer and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat heater switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 30 33 34 34 39 40 43 44 27 SWITCHES HEADLIGHT SWITCH (U.S.A.) When the headlights are on, the headlight indicator lights up in the instrument cluster. With the knob in the “AUTO” position, there may be a case that the headlights do not turn on immediately, even when the vehicle enters a dark place such as a tunnel or parking lot according to lighting conditions. In this case, we recommend you to twist the knob manually to the second clickstop to turn on the headlights immediately. When the headlight switch is turned to the first or second clickstop, the brightness of the instrument cluster will be reduced slightly unless the instrument panel light control dial is turned fully up. “DRL OFF” position “AUTO” position The daytime running light (DRL) system does not work when the knob is set in this position. The headlights and all other lights automatically turn on depending on the darkness of the surroundings when the ignition key is in the “ON” position.* For details, see the following “Daytime Running Light (DRL) System”. NOTE: * The sensitivity of the automatic light control sensor can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. To turn on the lights manually, twist the knob on the end of the lever. First clickstop: Only the parking, tail, license plate, side marker and instrument panel lights turn on. Second clickstop: Headlights also turn on. 28 SWITCHES To turn on the lights again, turn the ignition key to the “ON” position, or twist the knob on the end of lever to the “AUTO” position and then twist the knob until the first or second clickstop. If you are going to park for over one week, make sure the knob is in the “AUTO” or “DRL OFF” position. Daytime Running Light (DRL) System The automatic light control sensor is on the top of the driver’s side instrument panel. Do not place anything on the instrument panel, and/or do not affix anything on the windshield to block this sensor. When the knob is set in the “AUTO” position, the headlights turn on at reduced intensity when the parking brake is released with the engine started. They will not go off until the ignition switch is turned off. The headlights will automatically adjust to full intensity and/or turn on the other lights depending on the darkness of the surroundings. When the headlights are on, they automatically turn off about 30 seconds after any door or trunk lid is opened and closed with the ignition key turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.* If you want to turn off the lights immediately, push the “LOCK” button on the wireless remote control key twice. The lights also can be turned off immediately by pushing the “LOCK” button on the wireless remote control key with all the doors locked and the trunk lid closed. To turn on the other exterior lights and instrument panel lights, twist the knob to the first clickstop. NOTE: * The time before turning off the lights can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. NOTICE Twist the knob to the second clickstop to turn on the headlights to full intensity for driving at night. To cancel the DRL system, twist the knob to the “DRL OFF” position. To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running. 29 SWITCHES Automatic headlight leveling system (vehicles with discharge headlight only) Vehicle position changes according to loading condition, passengers getting on and off, vehicle acceleration and deceleration, etc. However, as the headlight beam level is always maintained automatically by the system at the proper level, your headlights do not dazzle other road users. If this system fails, the warning light in the instrument cluster comes on. If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer. If you replace the rear suspension and/or the vehicle height changes, contact your Lexus dealer to check the automatic headlight leveling system and headlight beam level. 30 HEADLIGHT SWITCH (Canada) To turn the lights on, twist the knob on the end of the lever. FIRST CLICKSTOP: Only the parking, tail, license plate, side marker and instrument panel lights turn on. SECOND CLICKSTOP: Headlights also turn on. THIRD CLICKSTOP (“AUTO”): The headlights and all other lights automatically turn on depending on the darkness of the surroundings.* NOTE: * The sensitivity of the automatic light control sensor can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. SWITCHES With the knob in the “AUTO” position, there may be a case that the headlights do not turn on immediately, even when the vehicle enters a dark place such as a tunnel or parking lot according to lighting conditions. In this case, we recommend you to twist the knob manually to the second clickstop to turn on the headlights immediately. When the tail lights are on, the tail light indicator lights up in the instrument cluster. When the headlight switch is turned to the first or second clickstop, the brightness of the instrument cluster will be reduced slightly unless the instrument panel light control dial is turned fully up. The automatic light control sensor is on the top of the driver’s side instrument panel. Do not place anything on the instrument panel, and/or do not affix anything on the windshield to block this sensor. When the headlights are on, they automatically turn off about 30 seconds after any door or trunk lid is opened and closed with the ignition key turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.* If you want to turn off the lights immediately, push the “LOCK” button on the wireless remote control key twice. The lights also can be turned off immediately by pushing the “LOCK” button on the wireless remote control key with all the doors locked and the trunk lid closed. NOTE: * The time before turning off the lights can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. 31 SWITCHES To turn on the lights again, turn the ignition key to the “ON” position, or turn the headlight switch off and then twist the knob until the first or second clickstop. Automatic headlight leveling system (vehicles with discharge headlight only) If you are going to park for over one week, make sure the headlight switch is off. Daytime Running Light System The headlights turn on at reduced intensity when the parking brake is released with the engine started, even with the light switch in the “OFF” position. They will not go off until the ignition switch is turned off. To turn on the other exterior lights and instrument panel lights, twist the knob to the first clickstop. Twist the knob to the second clickstop to turn on the headlights to full intensity for driving at night. When setting the knob to the third clickstop (“AUTO”), the headlights will automatically adjust to full intensity and/or turn on the other lights depending on the darkness of the surroundings. Likewise, as the surroundings become brighter, the headlights will turn to reduced intensity, ultimately turning off the other lights. NOTICE To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running. 32 Vehicle position changes according to loading condition, passengers getting on and off, vehicle acceleration and deceleration, etc. However, the headlight beam level is always maintained automatically by the system at the proper level so that your headlights do not dazzle other road users. If this system fails, the warning light in the instrument cluster comes on. If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer. If you replace the rear suspension and/or the vehicle height changes, contact your Lexus dealer to check the automatic headlight leveling system and headlight beam level. SWITCHES HEADLIGHT DIMMER AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH For signaling turns, move the lever up or down in the conventional manner. The ignition key must be in the “ON” position. For high beam, push the lever forward. Pull it back for low beam. For the headlight flasher, pull it further back. A blue light in the instrument cluster indicates high beam or headlight flasher is on. The headlight flasher works even when the headlight switch is off. The turn signal is self−cancelling after a turn, but after a lane change, you may have to cancel it by hand. You can also signal a lane change by moving the turn signal lever partway and holding it there. If the green light in the instrument cluster flashes faster than normal, it indicates that the front or rear turn signal bulb has burned out. If this indicator light does not come on, the fuse or the indicator light itself has probably failed. 33 SWITCHES FOG LIGHT SWITCH WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH Intermittent operation type To turn on the fog lights, turn the switch to the “ON” position. The fog lights come on only when the headlights are on low beam. Fog light indicator light in the instrument cluster will tell you that the fog lights are on. " 1 Interval adjuster 2 Washer on To turn the wipers on, move the lever down until you reach the desired speed setting. The ignition key must be in the “ON” position. There are 3 settings: “INT” position: Intermittent operation “LO” position: Low speed operation “HI” position: High speed operation 34 SWITCHES Twist the interval adjuster upward to increase the wiping time interval between sweeps, and downward to decrease it. When waxing your vehicle, make sure that the washer nozzles do not become blocked. If a nozzle becomes blocked, contact your Lexus dealer to have the vehicle serviced. The wiper lever must be in the “INT” position. To make the washer squirt, pull the lever toward you and release it. Also, the wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts even with the lever in the “OFF” position. NOTICE If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged. The low washer fluid warning light in the instrument cluster comes on when the fluid level in the tank becomes nearly empty. For information on adding washer fluid, see “Adding washer fluid” on page 348. In cold weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before using the washer. This will help prevent icing, which could block your vision. NOTICE Do not operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may scratch the glass. 35 SWITCHES Automatic operation Raindrop detection type The wiper speed is determined by the amount of raindrops and sunlight detected by the automatic wiper control sensor. Twist the automatic control adjuster in the “–” direction to lower the sensitivity, and the “+” direction to boost the sensitivity. " 1 Automatic control adjuster 2 Washer on To turn the wipers on, move the lever down until you reach the desired speed setting. The ignition switch must be in the “ON” position. There are 3 settings: “AUTO” position: Automatic operation The sensor is on the inside of the windshield as shown above. “LO” position: Low speed operation Even if the wiper lever is in the “AUTO” position, the system will switch to intermittent operations in the following conditions: “HI” position: High speed operation D When the windshield gets extremely cold (at less than –10_C or 14_F) D When the system malfunctions However, when the windshield gets extremely hot (at more than 90_C or 194_F), the wipers do not operate even if the wiper lever is in the “AUTO” position. 36 SWITCHES When the ignition switch is turned off with the wiper lever in the “AUTO” position, and then the ignition switch is turned on again, the automatic operation may not work even if raindrops are on the windshield. In this case, move the lever to another position and return it to the “AUTO” position again. CAUTION Be careful not to get your fingers caught between the wipers and windshield. When the wiper lever is in the “AUTO” position with the ignition switch on, the wipers could operate automatically in the following cases: D If you touch the upper center of the windshield adjacent to the sensor. D If you wipe the upper center of the windshield (adjacent to which the sensor is located) with a towel. D If the windshield vibrates. D If you touch the sensor. To make the washer squirt, pull the lever toward you and release it. Also, the wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts even with the lever in the “OFF” position. The low washer fluid warning light in the instrument cluster comes on when the fluid level in the tank becomes nearly empty. For information on adding washer fluid, see “Adding washer fluid” on page 348. In cold weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before using the washer. This will help prevent icing, which could block your vision. NOTICE Do not operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may scratch the glass. When waxing your vehicle, make sure that the washer nozzles do not become blocked. If a nozzle becomes blocked, contact your Lexus dealer to have the vehicle serviced. NOTICE NOTICE Do not apply detergent to or wet the automatic wiper control sensor when cleaning the inside of the windshield. If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged. 37 SWITCHES Shifting the windshield wiper position * More than 10 cm (3.9 in.) " 1 Rest position 2 Retracted position The wiper blades retract under the hood when the wipers are turned off. In the following cases, the wipers should be shifted from the retracted position (position 2) to the rest position (position 1) above the hood level. D When cleaning the windshield D When inspecting or replacing the wipers D When the retraction may be obstructed by snow, etc., at the bottom of the windshield Other than the above cases, keep the wipers in the retracted position. 38 SHIFTING TO THE REST POSITION Hold the connection of the wiper arm and wiper blade and pull it upward for more than 10 cm (3.9 in.) along the windshield glass with the force of about 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf). NOTICE To prevent the wiper blades from being deformed, be sure to hold the connection of the wiper arm and wiper blade securely. SWITCHES REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR DEFOGGER SWITCH RETURNING TO THE RETRACTED POSITION Push the connection of the wiper arm and wiper blade downward. NOTICE To prevent the wiper blades from being deformed, be sure to hold the connection of the wiper arm and wiper blade securely. To turn the electric rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger on, push the switch. The ignition key must be in the “ON” position. The thin heater wires on the inside of the rear window and the heater panels in the outside rear view mirrors will quickly clear the surface. An indicator light is on when the defogger is operating. The system will automatically shut off when the defogger has operated about 15 minutes. 39 SWITCHES POWER WINDOW SWITCHES CAUTION Since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch them when the switch is on. If further defrosting or defogging is desired, simply actuate the switch again. When the surface has cleared, push the switch once again to turn the defogger off. Continuous use may cause the battery to discharge, especially during stop−and−go driving. The defogger is not designed to dry rain water or to melt snow. If the outside rear view mirrors are heavily coated with ice, use a spray de−icer before operating the switch. NOTICE D When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or connectors. D To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn the switch off when the engine is not running. " 1 2 3 4 For driver’s window For front passenger’s window For left rear window For right rear window To raise or lower the windows, use the switch on each door. The passengers’ windows can also be controlled by the switches on the driver’s door. The power windows work when the ignition key is in the “ON” position. Key off operation: Even if the ignition key is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position with all the doors closed, the window can be operated until a front door is opened (or for 43 seconds). 40 SWITCHES Operating the window lock switch Operating the switch To lower the window, push the switch halfway down. Pull it up to raise the window. The window glass moves as long as the switch is operated. Automatic operation: To fully raise or lower the window automatically, pull the switch fully up or push it fully down. "Indicator lights With the window lock switch pressed in, only the driver’s window can be raised or lowered. The indicator lights on the switches tell you which of the switches can be operated. To stop the window partway, lightly push or pull the switch in the opposite direction and then release it. 41 SWITCHES Operating the windows from outside the vehicle The windows can be opened using an ignition key.* NOTE: * This feature can be deactivated. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. Jam protection function During automatic raising operation or key off raising operation, the window stops and is lowered if something gets caught between the window and window frame. If the window receives a strong impact, this function may work even if nothing is caught. CAUTION To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the following. Insert the ignition key into the key hole on the driver’s door. Turn the key in the unlocking direction and hold it. After the doors are unlocked, the windows begin to open. To stop in the middle, return the key. The windows also can be opened using the wireless remote control. For details, see page 19. 42 D Before you close the power windows, always make sure there is nobody around the power windows. You must also make sure the heads, hands and other parts of the bodies of all occupants are kept completely inside the vehicle. If someone’s neck, head or hands get caught in a closing window, it could result in a serious injury. When anyone closes the power windows, make sure he or she operates the windows safely. D When small children are in the vehicle, never let them use the power window switches without supervision. Use the window lock switch to prevent them from making unexpected use of the switches. SWITCHES D Never leave small children alone in the vehicle, especially with the ignition key still inserted. They could use the power window switches and get trapped in a window. Unattended children can be involved in serious accidents. EMERGENCY FLASHER SWITCH D Never try jamming any part of your body to make the jam protection function work intentionally. D The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window fully closed. To turn on the emergency flashers, push the switch. All the turn signal lights will flash. The emergency flashers will work with the engine running or off and with or without the ignition key. Turn on the emergency flashers to warn other drivers if you must stop your vehicle where it might be a traffic hazard. Always pull your vehicle as far off the road as possible. The turn signal light switch will not work when the emergency flashers are in operation. 43 SWITCHES NOTICE SEAT HEATER SWITCHES To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the switch on longer than necessary when the engine is not running. " 1 For driver’s seat 2 For front passenger’s seat To turn on the seat heater, push the switch. At this time, the indicator lamp comes on. The ignition switch must be in the “ON” position. Each time you push the switch, the mode changes in order from the “HI” (high heating temperature) mode to “LO” (low heating temperature) mode to off. The seat heater automatically changes to off mode when the ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position again, the seat heater remains off until the switch is pushed. 44 SWITCHES CAUTION NOTICE Occupants must use caution when operating the seat heater because they may experience minor burns even at low temperatures. Use extra caution for; D Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat. D Babies, small children, elderly persons, sick persons or handicapped persons D When cleaning the seats, do not use organic substances (paint thinner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline, etc.). They may damage the heater and seat surface. D Persons who have delicate skin D Persons who are exhausted D Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs which induce sleep (sleeping drug, cold remedy, etc.). D To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn the switches off when the engine is not running. To prevent the seat from overheating, do not use the seat heater with a blanket, cushion, or other insulating objects which cover the seat. 45 SWITCHES 46 Finish SECTION 1–3 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Gauges, meters and service reminder indicators Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi−information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 48 49 50 50 59 61 47 Finish GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS FUEL GAUGE See the inner back cover for fuel capacity and recommended fuel selection. ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE "Low fuel level warning light The gauge is displayed when the ignition switch is on and indicates the approximate quantity of fuel remaining in the tank. It is a good idea to keep the tank over 1/4 full. If the fuel level approaches “E” or the low fuel level warning light comes on, fill the fuel tank as soon as possible. On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the fuel gauge needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level warning light may come on earlier than usual. If the fuel tank is completely empty, the malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fill the fuel tank immediately. The indicator lamp goes off after driving several times. If the indicator lamp does not go off, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. 48 "Normal range The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature when the ignition switch is on. The engine operating temperature will vary with changes in weather and engine load. If the needle points to the red zone or higher, stop your vehicle and allow the engine to cool. Finish GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS Your vehicle may overheat during severe operating conditions, such as: TACHOMETER D Driving up a long hill on a hot day. D Reducing speed or stopping after high speed driving. D Idling for a long period with the air conditioning on in stop−and−go traffic. D Towing a trailer. 13E064 NOTICE D Do not remove the thermostat in the engine cooling system as this may cause the engine to overheat. The thermostat is designed to control the flow of coolant to keep the temperature of the engine within the specified operating range. D Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. See “If your vehicle overheats” on page 269. The tachometer indicates engine speed in thousands of rpm (revolutions per minute). Use it while driving to prevent engine over−revving. Driving with the engine running too fast causes excessive engine wear and poor fuel economy. Remember, in most cases the slower the engine speed, the greater the fuel economy. NOTICE Do not let the indicator needle get into the red zone. This may cause severe engine damage. 49 Finish GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS ODOMETER AND TRIP METER SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS AND WARNING BUZZERS IF THIS INDICATOR OR BUZZER COMES ON ... (a) or This meter displays the odometer and two trip meters. To change the mode indication, push the trip meter reset knob briefly. Each time you push the knob, the mode changes in order from the odometer to trip meter A to trip meter B, then back to the odometer. The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The twin trip meter records two different distances independently. (indicator and buzzer) The data of trip meters will be cancelled if the electrical power source is disconnected. 50 Fasten front passenger’s seat belt. (c) (on the center console) (d) Take vehicle to Lexus dealer immediately. (e) Stop and check. For example, you can use one meter to calculate the fuel economy and the other to measure the distance on each trip. To set the A trip meter to zero, display the A meter reading, push the knob and hold it. The same applies for the B trip meter. If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Lexus dealer. Fasten driver’s seat belt. (b) "Trip meter reset knob DO THIS. Finish GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS IF THIS INDICATOR OR BUZZER COMES ON ... IF THIS INDICATOR OR BUZZER COMES ON ... DO THIS. DO THIS. Take vehicle to Lexus dealer. (f) Stop and check. (l) (g) Add engine oil. (m) Add washer fluid. (h) Take vehicle to Lexus dealer. (n) Take vehicle to Lexus dealer. Take vehicle to Lexus dealer. (o) Low fuel level warning light Fill up tank. (j) Close all doors. (p) Key reminder buzzer Remove key. (k) Replace bulb. (i) or 51 Finish GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS (a) Brake System Warning Light This light comes on in the following cases when the ignition key is in the “ON” position. D When the parking brake is applied ... This light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position even after the parking brake is released. D When the brake fluid level is low ... CAUTION It is dangerous to continue driving normally when the brake fluid level is low. Have your vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer in the following cases. D The light does not come on even if the parking brake is applied when the ignition key is in the “ON” position. D The light does not come on even if the ignition key is turned on with the parking brake released. A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not indicate a problem. 52 CAUTION If either of the following conditions occurs, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. D The light does not turn off even after the parking brake is released while the engine is running. In this case, the brakes may not work properly and your stopping distance will become longer. Depress the brake pedal firmly and bring the vehicle to an immediate stop. D The brake system warning light remains on together with the “ABS” warning light. In this case, not only the anti−lock brake system will fail but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking. (b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light and Buzzer This light and buzzer remind you to buckle up the driver’s seat belt. Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or “START”, the reminder light and buzzer come on if the driver’s seat belt is not fastened. Unless the driver fastens the belt, the light stays on and the buzzer stops after about 4 to 8 seconds. Finish GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS (c) Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Reminder Light This light reminds you to buckle up the front passenger’s seat belt. Once the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, the reminder light flashes if a front passenger sits in the front passenger seat and does not fasten the seat belt. Unless the front passenger fastens the belt, the light keeps flashing. If luggage load is placed on the front passenger seat, depending on its weight and how it is placed on the seat, built−in sensors in the seat cushion may detect the pressure, causing the reminder light to come on. (d) SRS Warning Light This light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This means the SRS airbags and seat belt pretensioners are operating properly. This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the parts monitored by the warning light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle. D When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, the light does not come on, remains on or flashes. D The light comes on or starts flashing while driving. If the light stays on, it indicates that the driver and front passenger airbags fail. If the light flashes, the side and curtain shield airbags and/or seat belt pretensioners fail. (e) Discharge Warning Light This light warns that the battery is being discharged. If it comes on while you are driving, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine, and check for the cause. Look first at the engine drive belt. D If it is loose or broken, the generator will not charge the battery properly. D If the belt is O.K., there is a problem somewhere in the charging system. The engine ignition will continue to operate, however, until the battery is discharged. Turn off the air conditioning, blower, radio, etc., and drive directly to the nearest Lexus dealer or repair shop. 53 Finish GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS NOTICE Do not continue driving if the engine drive belt is broken or loose. (f) Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light This light warns that the engine oil pressure is too low. If it flickers or stays on while you are driving, pull off the road to a safe place and stop the engine immediately. Call a Lexus dealer or qualified repair shop for assistance. The light may occasionally flicker when the engine is idling or it may come on briefly after a hard stop. There is no cause for concern if it then goes out when the engine is accelerated slightly. The light may come on when the oil level is extremely low. It is not designed to indicate low oil level, and the oil level must be checked using the oil level dipstick. NOTICE Do not drive the vehicle with the warning light on − even for one block. It may ruin the engine. (g) Low Engine Oil Level Warning Light This light warns that the engine oil level is too low. Add oil as soon as possible. (For instructions, see “Checking the engine oil level” on page 311.) While driving on steep inclines or rough roads which causes the vehicle to substantially sway or on curves, this light may come on due to the movement of engine oil in the engine. In normal conditions, due to engine oil consumption, this light may come on earlier than the specified service interval of the scheduled maintenance. This is because the engine oil is consumed to the low level within the scheduled maintenance interval and does not indicate a problem. (For detailed information, see “Facts about engine oil consumption” on page 309.) NOTICE Continued engine operation with low engine oil will damage the engine. (h) Malfunction Indicator Lamp This lamp comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position and goes off after the engine starts. This means that the warning light system is operating properly. If the lamp remains on, or the lamp comes on while driving, first check the followings. 54 Finish GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS D Empty fuel tank If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immediately. D Loose fuel tank cap CAUTION Be especially careful to prevent erroneous pedal operation. If the fuel tank cap is loose, securely tighten it. These cases are temporary malfunctions. The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips. If the lamp will not go off even after the several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. If the fuel tank is not empty or the fuel tank cap is not loose... D There is a problem somewhere in the engine, emission control system, electronic throttle control system, automatic transmission electrical system or warning light system itself. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle. Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs Your vehicle may not pass a state emission inspection if the malfunction indicator lamp remains on. Contact your Lexus dealer to check your vehicle’s emission control system and OBD (On−Board Diagnostics) system before taking your vehicle for the inspection. For details, see “Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs” on page 293. (i) “ABS” Warning Light Vehicles without vehicle skid control system— If the engine speed does not increase with the accelerator pedal depressed down, there may be a problem somewhere in your electronic throttle control system. The light comes on with the ignition key turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−lock brake system works properly, the light turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter, if the system malfunctions, the light comes on again. At this time, vibration may occur. However, if you depress the accelerator pedal more firmly and slowly, you can drive your vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the anti−lock brake system does not operate, but the brake system still operates conventionally. Even if the abnormality of the electronic throttle control system is corrected during low speed driving, the system may not be recovered until the engine is stopped and the ignition key is turned to “ACC” or “LOCK” position. When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the anti−lock brake system does not operate so that the wheels could lock up during a sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. 55 Finish GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the parts monitored by the warning light. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle. D The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, or remains on. D The light comes on while you are driving. A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not indicate a problem. CAUTION If the “ABS” warning light remains on together with the brake system warning light, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. In this case, not only the anti−lock brake system will fail but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking. Vehicles with vehicle skid control system— The light comes on with the ignition key turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−lock brake system and the brake assist system work properly, the light turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter, if the system malfunctions, the light comes on again. 56 When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the anti−lock brake system, the brake assist system, the traction control system and the vehicle skid control system do not operate, but the brake system still operates conventionally. When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the anti−lock brake system does not operate so that the wheels could lock up during a sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the parts monitored by the warning light. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle. D The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, or remains on. D The light comes on while you are driving. A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not indicate a problem. CAUTION If the “ABS” warning light remains on together with the brake system warning light, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. In this case, not only the anti−lock brake system will fail but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking. Finish GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS This light remains on until all the doors are completely closed. The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will come on when the “VSC” warning light comes on even if the “TRAC OFF” switch is not pushed. (k) Rear Light Failure Warning Light (m) Low Washer Fluid Warning Light If this light comes on when the headlight switch is turned on (at the first or second clickstop), it indicates that one or more of the tail lights are burned out. This light comes on when the fluid level in the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill the tank as soon as possible. If it comes on when the brake pedal is depressed, one or more stop lights are burned out. (n) Automatic Headlight Leveling System Warning Light (vehicles with discharge headlight only) (j) Open Door Warning Light Have defective bulbs replaced as soon as possible. (l) Vehicle Skid Control System/Traction Control System Warning Light This light warns that when there is a problem somewhere in the automatic headlight leveling system. If it comes on, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer. This light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the vehicle skid control system or traction control system. (o) Low Fuel Level Warning Light The light will come on when the ignition key is turned to “ON” and will go off after a few seconds. This light comes on when the fuel level in the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill the tank as soon as possible. If the light comes on while driving, the system does not work. However, as conventional braking operates when applied, there is no problem to continue your driving. On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the low fuel level warning light may come on earlier than usual. In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer: (p) Key Reminder Buzzer D The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is turned to “ON”. This buzzer reminds you to remove the key when you open the driver’s door with the ignition key in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. D The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned to “ON”. D The warning light comes on while driving. 57 Finish GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS How to check all the service reminder indicators (except the low fuel level warning light and low washer fluid warning light): The following service reminder indicators go off after a few seconds. or 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Open the door. w069 The following service reminder indicator should come on. It goes off when you close the door completely. The following service reminder indicator goes off after 6 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition key to “ON”. The following service reminder indicators should come on. or or w069 58 If any service reminder indicator or warning buzzer does not function as described above, have it checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Finish GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS MULTI−INFORMATION DISPLAY The following information is displayed in the instrument cluster when you push the “MODE” button with the ignition switch turned on. Each time you push the “MODE” button, the display toggles through this information. (1) Instantaneous fuel consumption (2) Average fuel consumption (3) Driving range (4) Average vehicle speed (5) Driving time 13E068 The displayed values in the multi−information display indicate general driving conditions. Accuracy varies with driving habits and road conditions. When the ignition switch is on, the last previously used mode displayed just before the ignition switch is off will appear. If the electrical power source has been disconnected from the multi−information display, the display will automatically be set to the initial mode. When the instrument panel lights are turned on, the brightness of the display will be reduced. CAUTION Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped. 59 Finish GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS (1) Instantaneous fuel consumption (“MPG” or “L/100km”) (3) Driving range (“RANGE MI” or “RANGE km”) The instantaneous fuel consumption is calculated and displayed based on distance and fuel consumption for 2 seconds with the engine running. The distance the vehicle can travel with the remaining fuel is calculated and displayed based on the quantity of remaining fuel and past fuel consumption. The displayed value is updated every 2 seconds. The driving range display indicates the approximate distance that you can drive until the fuel gauge reaches “E”. It is different from the actual distance traveled. Note that an accurate figure may not be shown in the following cases. D When the vehicle is stopped with the engine running, the display will indicate the extremely high fuel consumption. D When the vehicle is driving down a long slope, applying the engine brake, the display will indicate the extremely low fuel consumption. The calculation is reset when the ignition switch is turned off. The displayed value is updated every time the fuel equivalent for 1 mile or 1 km is consumed. Every time you refuel the vehicle, the calculation is reset. The actual driving range varies with driving habits and road conditions. If fuel consumption is good, the driving range will be longer. If fuel consumption is poor, the driving range will be shorter. (2) Average fuel consumption (“AVG. MPG” or “AVG. L/100 km”) If the low fuel level warning light comes on, refuel even if the display indicates that the vehicle can be driven further. Average fuel consumption is calculated and displayed based on total driving distance and total fuel consumption with the engine running. (4) Average vehicle speed (“AVG. MPH” or “AVG. km/h”) The displayed value is updated every 10 seconds. To reset the calculations, push the “RESET” button. Average vehicle speed is calculated and displayed based on total driving distance and total driving time with the engine running. The displayed value is updated every 10 seconds. To reset the calculations, push the “RESET” button. 60 Finish GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS (5) Driving time (“E/T”) INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT CONTROL The elapsed time after the engine starts is displayed. When the engine is started, driving time is counted from 0:00. Up to 99:59 (99 hours, 59 minutes) can be displayed. When the driving time exceeds 99:59, the counter returns to 0:00. To reset the calculations, push the “RESET” button. To adjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights, turn the dial. With the dial turned fully up, the intensity of the instrument panel lights will not be reduced when the headlight switch is on. If the instrument panel light control dial is turned fully down, the foot lights will turn off. 61 Finish GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS 62 Finish SECTION 1–4 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Interior equipment Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cigarette lighter and ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overhead console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grocery bag hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coat hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear electric sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tie−down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage stowage precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 65 66 66 67 68 69 70 70 71 74 75 76 77 78 79 79 80 81 63 Finish INTERIOR EQUIPMENT VANITY MIRRORS To turn on the vanity light, slide the switch. To use the vanity mirror, swing the sun visor down and open the cover. The vanity light switch has the following positions: “ON”—Turns the light on when you swing down the sun visor. However, if the visor has been slid out, the light may not come on. “OFF”—Turns the light off. 64 Finish INTERIOR EQUIPMENT Sun visors INTERIOR LIGHT 14E130 1 To block out glare from the front , swing the sun visor down. To turn on the interior light, slide the switch. 2 To block out glare from the side, remove the sun visor from the hook and swing it to the side. “ON”—Keeps the light on all the time. 3 To block out glare coming obliquely from behind you, slide the visor backward. At this position, the vanity light does not come on. The interior light switch has the following positions: “OFF”—Turns the light off. “DOOR”—Turns the light on when any of the doors is opened. The light goes off when all the doors are closed. For details, see “Illuminated entry system” on page 66. 65 Finish INTERIOR EQUIPMENT PERSONAL LIGHTS ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM 14E133 To turn on the personal light, push the switch. To turn it off, push the switch again. " 1 2 3 4 66 Ignition switch light Interior light (with the “DOOR” position) Door courtesy lights Foot lights Finish INTERIOR EQUIPMENT All of the lights will come on when any of the doors are opened.* After all the doors are closed, the lights remain on for about 15 seconds before fading out.** CLOCK NOTE: * The operating condition can be changed. ** The duration of lighting can be changed and only the foot lights can be set not to come on. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. However, in the following cases, the lights go out immediately: D All the doors are closed and the ignition key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position. (The foot lights come on when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. See the following “Foot lights”.) D All the doors are locked. When all the doors are unlocked simultaneously using either the key or the wireless remote control, all of the lights will come on and remain on for about 15 seconds before fading out. Foot lights The foot lights also come on when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position with the selector lever in the “P” position. When the selector lever is moved out of the “P” position, the foot lights will be dimmed.* NOTE: * The foot lights can be set to turn off when the selector lever is moved out of the “P” position. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. The digital clock indicates the time with the ignition key at the “ACC” or “ON” position. To reset the hour, press the “H” button. To reset the minutes, press the “M” button. To adjust the time to the nearest hour, press the “:00” button. For example, if the “:00” button is pressed when the time is between 9:30 − 9:59 or between 10:01 − 10:29, the time will change to 10:00. With the tail lights on, the brightness of the time indication will be reduced. If the electrical power source has been disconnected from the clock, the time display will automatically be set to 1:00 (one o’clock). When the instrument panel light control dial is turned fully down, the foot lights will turn off. 67 Finish INTERIOR EQUIPMENT CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND ASHTRAY Use a Lexus genuine cigarette lighter or equivalent for replacement. When finished with your cigarette, thoroughly extinguish it in the ashtray to prevent other cigarette butts from catching fire. After using the ashtray, close the lid completely. To remove the ashtray, pull it out while pressing on the snuffer bridge to release the catch. CAUTION To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or sudden stop while driving, always completely close the ashtray after use. "Cigarette lighter and ashtray To use the cigarette lighter and ashtray, first push against the ashtray cover. Then when the ashtray opens out, press in the cigarette lighter. After it finishes heating up, it automatically pops out ready for use. Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in. If the engine is not running, the ignition key must be in the “ACC” position to use the lighter. When finished with your cigarette, thoroughly extinguish it in the ashtray to prevent other cigarette butts from catching fire. After using the ashtray, push it back in completely. To remove the ashtray, just pull it up. 68 Finish INTERIOR EQUIPMENT POWER OUTLET D Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use. Inserting a foreign object other than the appropriate plug that fits the outlet, or allowing any liquid into the outlet may cause electrical failure or short circuits. The power outlet is designed for power supply for car accessories. The ignition key must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position for the power outlet to be used. NOTICE D To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the electricity over the total vehicle capacity of 12V/120W. D To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not running. 69 Finish INTERIOR EQUIPMENT GLOVE BOX REAR CONSOLE BOX 14E104 " 1 Unlock 2 Open 3 Lock 2 Console box To open the glove box door, pull the lever. To lock the glove box door, insert the master key and turn it clockwise. To access the upper tray, push the lock release button and raise the lid. To access the console box, pull up the lock release lever and raise the lid. With the tail lights on, the glove box light will come on when the glove box door is open. The rear console box light comes on when the tail lights are turned on. The trunk lid opener main switch is installed inside the glove box. See page 85 for further information. CAUTION CAUTION To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, always keep the glove box door closed while driving. 70 " 1 Upper tray To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, always keep the rear console box closed while driving. Finish INTERIOR EQUIPMENT GARAGE DOOR OPENER The garage door opener (HomeLink R Universal Transceiver) is manufactured under license from HomeLinkR and can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, and security systems, etc. (a) Programming the HomeLinkR The battery side of the hand−held transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLinkR during the programming process. For Canadian users, follow the procedure in “Programming an entrance gate/Programming all devices in the Canadian market”. 1. Decide which of 3 HomeLinkR buttons you want to program. 2. Place your hand−held garage transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away from the surface of the HomeLinkR. Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink R in view while programming. 3. Simultaneously press and hold the hand−held garage transmitter button along with the selected HomeLinkR button. 4. When the indicator light on the HomeLinkR changes from a slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both buttons. 5. Test the operation of the HomeLinkR by pressing the newly programmed button. If programming a garage door opener, check to see if the garage door opens and closes. " 1 Indicator light 2 Buttons The HomeLinkR in your vehicle has 3 buttons and you can store one program for each button. To ensure correct programming into the HomeLinkR, install a new battery in the hand−held transmitter prior to programming. 71 Finish INTERIOR EQUIPMENT If the garage door does not operate, identify if your garage transmitter is of the “Rolling Code” type. Press and hold the programmed HomeLinkR button. The garage door has the rolling code feature if the indicator light (on the HomeLinkR) flashes rapidly and then remains lit after 2 seconds. If your garage transmitter is the “Rolling Code” type, proceed to the heading “Programming a rolling code system”. 3. Press and release the vehicle’s programmed HomeLinkR button twice. The garage door may open. If the door does open, the programming process is complete. If the door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third press and release will complete the programming process by opening the garage door. 6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each remaining HomeLinkR button to program another device. The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize the HomeLinkR unit and be able activate the garage door up/down. Programming a rolling code system 4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each remaining HomeLinkR button to program another rolling code system. If your device is “Rolling Code” equipped, it is necessary to follow steps 1 through 4 under the heading “Programming the HomeLinkR” before proceeding with the steps listed below. Programming an entrance gate / Programming all devices in the Canadian market 1. Locate the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may vary by brand of garage door opener. Refer to the owner’s guide supplied by the garage door opener manufacturer for the location of this “training” button. 1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLinkR buttons you want to program. 2. Press the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor. Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink R in view while programming. Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3 below. 3. Press and hold the selected HomeLinkR button. 2. Place your hand−held gate/device transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away from the surface of the HomeLinkR. 4. Continuously press and release (cycle) the hand−held gate/device transmitter button every two seconds until step 5 is complete. 5. When the indicator light on the HomeLinkR changes from a slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both buttons. 72 Finish INTERIOR EQUIPMENT 6. Test the operation of the HomeLinkR by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly. (c) Erasing the entire HomeLinkR memory (all three programs) 7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each remaining HomeLinkR button to program another device. To erase all previously programmed codes at one time, press and hold down the 2 outside buttons for 20 seconds until the indicator light flashes. Programming other devices If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the HomeLinkR memory. To program other devices such as home security systems, home door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus dealer for assistance. Reprogramming a button Individual HomeLinkR buttons cannot be erased, however, to reprogram a single button, follow the procedure “Programming the HomeLinkR”. (b) Operating the HomeLinkR To operate the HomeLinkR, press the appropriate HomeLinkR button to activate the programmed device. The HomeLinkR indicator light should come on. The HomeLinkR continues to send the signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed. CAUTION D When programming the HomeLinkR Universal Transceiver, you may be operating a garage door or other device. Make sure people and objects are out of the way of the garage door or other device to prevent potential harm or damage. D Do not use this HomeLinkR Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards. (This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.) A garage door opener which cannot detect an object (signaling the door to stop and reverse), does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases risk of serious injury or death. 73 Finish INTERIOR EQUIPMENT CUP HOLDERS FCC ID: CB2V94800 CANADA: 1763 102 264 This device complies with FCC Rules Part 15. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING: This transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device. "Front cup holder To use the front cup holder, push the cup holder portion of the rear console box. 74 Finish INTERIOR EQUIPMENT OVERHEAD CONSOLE BOX "Rear cup holder To use the rear cup holder, pull down the armrest and open the cover. The cup holder is designed for holding cups or drink−cans securely. CAUTION D Do not place anything else other than cups or drink−cans in the cup holder, as such items may be thrown about in the compartment and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an accident. To use the overhead console box, push the lid. CAUTION D To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, always keep the overhead console box closed while driving. D As this box is designed for holding eyeglasses, do not place any object heavier than approximately 60 g (0.13 lb.) in it. Heavier objects may cause the box to open and the contents to fly out resulting in injuries. D To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or sudden stop while driving, keep the cup holder closed when not in use. 75 Finish INTERIOR EQUIPMENT NOTICE During hot weather, the interior of the vehicle becomes very hot. Do not leave anything flammable or deformable such as a lighter, glasses, etc. inside. AUXILIARY BOXES To use them, open as shown in the following illustrations. "On the instrument panel To remove the adapter tray inside of the box, pull it up. 76 Finish INTERIOR EQUIPMENT FLOOR MAT 14E116 "In the trunk CAUTION To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, always keep the auxiliary box closed while driving. Use a floor mat of the correct size. If the floor carpet and floor mat have 2 holes, then they are designed for use with locking clips. Fix the floor mat with locking clips into the holes in the floor carpet. 77 Finish INTERIOR EQUIPMENT GROCERY BAG HOOK 14E125 CAUTION Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the floor carpet. If the floor mat slips and interferes with the movement of the pedals during driving, it may cause an accident. To use the grocery bag hook, push the lower portion of the hook. This hook is designed for hanging things like a grocery bag. NOTICE To prevent damage to the hook, do not hang any object heavier than approximately 3 kg (7 lb.) on it. 78 Finish INTERIOR EQUIPMENT COAT HOOKS REAR ELECTRIC SUNSHADE 14E137 To use the coat hook, push the hook. To raise the rear electric sunshade, push the switch. To lower the sunshade, push the same switch again. CAUTION The sunshade works when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. Do not hook a hanger, heavy or sharp pointed object on the coat hook. If the curtain shield airbag inflates, those items will be hurled away with great force or the curtain shield airbag may not activate correctly. When you hang clothes, hang them on the coat hook directly. When the selector lever is shifted into the “R” position while the sunshade is raised, the sunshade will be automatically lowered. To raise the sunshade, move the selector lever out of “R” position and push the switch again. 79 Finish INTERIOR EQUIPMENT CAUTION TIE−DOWN HOOKS D Do not touch the brackets fastening the sunshade to avoid injuring your fingers or hands. D Do not put your fingers in the sunshade groove while the sunshade is operating to avoid getting them caught or injured by the runner. 14E092 NOTICE D To prevent the vehicle battery from being discharged, always operate the sunshade while the engine is running. D Observe the following to avoid damage and/or malfunction: Do not overload the sunshade motor and other parts (for instance by pushing down on the sunshade bracket while it is opening). Do not place anything where they may hinder the opening/closing of the sunshade. Do not affix anything to the sunshade. Clean the sunshade groove if there is any foreign matter or dust on it. Do not operate the rear electric sunshade repeatedly for a long time as its motor may overheat. 80 To secure your luggage, use the tie−down hooks as shown above. See “Luggage stowage precautions” on page 81 for precautions in loading luggage. Finish INTERIOR EQUIPMENT LUGGAGE STOWAGE PRECAUTIONS When stowing luggage or cargo in the vehicle, observe the following: NOTICE Do not load the vehicle beyond the vehicle capacity weight specified on the tire pressure label. D Put luggage or cargo in the trunk when at all possible. Be sure all items are secured in place. D Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance. D For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight. CAUTION D Do not place anything on the package tray behind the rear seatback. Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or an accident. D Do not drive with objects left on top of the instrument panel. They may interfere with the driver’s field of view. Or they may move during sharp vehicle acceleration or turning, and impair the driver’s control of the vehicle. In an accident they may injure the vehicle occupants. 81 Finish INTERIOR EQUIPMENT 82 SECTION 1–5 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Exterior equipment Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 85 87 90 83 EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT HOOD 2. Insert your fingers under the hood, push up the auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood. 1. To open the hood, pull the hood lock release lever under the instrument panel. The hood will spring up slightly. Before closing the hood, check to see that you have not forgotten any tools, rags, etc. Then lower the hood and make sure it locks. CAUTION Before driving, be sure that the hood is securely locked. Otherwise, the hood may open unexpectedly while driving and an accident may occur. 84 EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT TRUNK LID Trunk lid opener CAUTION Keep the trunk lid closed while driving. This not only keeps the luggage from being thrown out, but also prevents exhaust gases from entering the vehicle. Trunk lid opener main switch To open the trunk lid, push the switch. To close the trunk lid, lower it and press down on it. After closing the trunk lid, try pulling it up to make sure it is securely closed. The trunk lid can be unlocked using the wireless remote control key. For details, see page 18. " 1 Main switch 2 Operative 3 Inoperative If you do not want to activate the trunk lid opener system, turn off the main switch in the glove box. To turn it on, push in the main switch. 85 EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT The trunk lid can be opened using a loop of wire in the trunk even with the main switch in the glove box turned off. When keeping items in the trunk, be sure to turn off the main switch and lock the glove box and rear armrest door. For locking the glove box, see page 70. For locking the rear armrest door, see page 99. In case the opener is not actuated 2. Pull the loop of wire to unlock the trunk lid. This is used in case the trunk lid cannot be unlocked due to a discharged battery or other trouble. 1. Pull down the rear armrest and open the rear armrest door. 86 EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT Internal trunk release handle If a person is locked in the trunk, he/she can pull down the phosphorescent handle on the inside of trunk lid to open the trunk lid. FUEL TANK CAP This indicates that the fuel filler door is on the left side of your vehicle. The phosphorescent (glow−in−the−dark) handle will continue to glow for a time after the trunk lid is closed. Exposing the handle to stronger light will cause it to glow longer. CAUTION D Always lock the trunk lid and all doors, and keep away the vehicle keys out of children’s reaches. D Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Unsupervised children may lock themselves in the vehicle or trunk and suffer serious injuries or death. 87 EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT 1. To open the fuel filler door, push the switch. When refueling, turn off the engine. CAUTION D Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames when refuelling. The fumes are flammable. D When opening the cap, do not remove the cap quickly. In hot weather, fuel under pressure could cause injury by spraying out of the filler neck if the cap is suddenly removed. 88 2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn the cap counterclockwise by 90 degrees (to the pressure point 1 ), and then turn it an additional 30 degrees (to point 2 ). Pause slightly before removing it. Although a click will be heard as you turn the cap to point 1 , it does not indicate that the cap can be removed. It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh when the cap is opened. EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT When installing the cap, turn the cap clockwise until you hear one click. When you hear the click, the cap is fully closed. If the cap is not tightened securely, the malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Make sure the cap is tightened securely. The indicator lamp goes off after driving several times. If the indicator lamp does not go off, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. CAUTION 3. The removed cap can be stored on the back side of the fuel filler door. Position the cap so that the hooks point to the left and right, and set it in the receptacle on the back side of the door. D Make sure the cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in case of an accident. D Use only a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap for replacement. It is designed to regulate fuel tank pressure. NOTICE Observe the following precautions. Otherwise, the cap could be damaged or become hard to open. D Apply force only in the turning direction to the cap. Do not pull or pry it. D Do not tighten the cap further after you hear one click when installing. 89 EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT MOON ROOF In case the opener is not actuated Remove the cover and pull up the manual lever in the trunk. " 1 Open This is used in case the fuel filler door cannot be opened due to a discharged battery or other trouble. To slide open the moon roof, push the switch on the “SLIDE OPEN” side for about 1 second. The moon roof will fully open. To stop partway, push the same side or “TILT UP” side briefly. 2 Close The sunshade can be opened or closed manually. However, if you open the moon roof, the sunshade will be opened with the moon roof. To close the moon roof, push the switch on the “TILT UP” side for about 1 second. The moon roof will fully close. To stop partway, push the same side or “SLIDE OPEN” side briefly. 90 EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT To slide open the tilted−up moon roof: Push the switch on the “SLIDE OPEN” side to tilt down the moon roof. After releasing the switch, push the switch on the same side again. Key off operation: Even if the ignition key is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position, the moon roof can be operated until a front door is opened (or for 43 seconds). To tilt up the slide−opened moon roof: Push the switch on the “TILT UP” side to close the moon roof fully. After releasing the switch, push the switch on the same side again. Operating the moon roof from outside the vehicle The moon roof can be opened using an ignition key.* NOTE: * This feature can be deactivate. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. " 1 Tilt down 2 Tilt up To tilt up the moon roof, push the switch on the “TILT UP” side for about 1 second. The moon roof will fully tilt up. To stop partway, push the same side or “SLIDE OPEN” side briefly. To tilt down the moon roof, push the switch on the “SLIDE OPEN” side for about 1 second. The moon roof will fully tilt down. To stop partway, push the same side or “TILT UP” side briefly. To operate the moon roof, the ignition key must be in the “ON” position. Insert the ignition key into the key hole on the driver’s door. Turn the key in the unlocking direction and hold it. 91 EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT After the door is unlocked, the moon roof begins to open. To stop in the middle, return the key. CAUTION The moon roof also can be opened using the wireless remote control. For details, see page 19. To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the following. Jam protection function D While the vehicle is moving, always keep the heads, hands and other parts of the bodies of all occupants away from the roof opening. Otherwise, they could be seriously injured if the vehicle stops suddenly or if the vehicle is involved in an accident. During closing operation, the moon roof stops and opens if something gets caught into the roof opening. If the moon roof receives a strong impact, this function may work even if nothing is caught. If the battery is disconnected or run down The moon roof may not operate automatically and the jam protection function will not function correctly after you reconnect, replace or recharge the battery. In any of these cases, you should normalize the moon roof. To normalize the moon roof, push and hold the switch on the “TILT UP” side until the moon roof tilts all the way up and then tilts down a little automatically. Make sure that the moon roof opens and closes automatically. If the moon roof cannot be operated properly, have it checked by your Lexus dealer. D Before you close the moon roof, always make sure there is nobody around the moon roof. You must also make sure nobody places his or her head, hands and other parts of the body in the roof opening. If someone’s neck, head or hands get caught in the closing roof, it could result in a serious injury. When anyone closes the moon roof, first make sure it is safe to do so. D Never leave small children alone in the vehicle, especially with the ignition key still inserted. They could use the moon roof switches and get trapped in the roof opening. Unattended children can be involved in serious accidents. D Never sit on top of the vehicle around the roof opening. D Never try jamming any part of your body to make the jam protection function work intentionally. D The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof fully closed. 92 SECTION 1–6 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Comfort adjustment Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Trunk storage extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Tilt steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Power adjustable pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 SRS airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Driving position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 93 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT FRONT SEATS Front seat precautions Seat adjustment precautions Adjust the driver’s seat so that the foot pedals, steering wheel and instrument panel controls are within easy reach of the driver. CAUTION The SRS side airbags are installed in the driver and front passenger seats. Observe the following precautions. D Do not lean against the front door when the vehicle is in use, since the side airbag inflates with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, you may be killed or seriously injured. D Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, causing death or serious injury. D Do not modify or replace the seats or upholstery of the front seats with the side airbags. Such changes may disable the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury. Consult your Lexus dealer if you insist on modifications of this kind. 94 CAUTION D Do not adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. D Be careful that the seat does not hit a passenger, luggage or the rear seat. NOTICE Do not operate the control switch in more than one dimension at a time. It may cause electrical overload. COMFORT ADJUSTMENT Adjusting front seats " 1 Seat position, seat cushion angle and seat cushion height control switch 2 Seatback angle control switch 3 Lumbar support control switch Adjusting seat position 16E298 Move the control switch in the desired direction. Releasing the switch will stop the seat in that position. Do not place anything under the seat, as this might interfere with the seat movement. 95 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT Adjusting seatback angle Adjusting seat cushion angle and height Move the control switch in the desired direction. Move the control switch in the desired direction. Releasing the switch will stop the seatback in that position. Releasing the switch will stop the seat cushion in that position. CAUTION To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, avoid reclining the seatback any more than needed. The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal or rear collision when the driver and the passenger are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen. In the event of a frontal collision, the more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of personal injury. 96 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT Adjusting lumbar support (driver’s seat only) HEAD RESTRAINTS Front seats Push the control switch on either side. The amount of lumbar support will change while the switch is pushed. To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, press the lock release button and push the head restraint down. To move the head restraint forward or rearward, pull or push the base of the head restraint. The head restraint is most effective when it is close to your head. Therefore, using a cushion on the seatback is not recommended. 97 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT CAUTION Rear seats D Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is closest to the top of your ears. D After adjusting the head restraint, make sure it is locked in position. D Do not drive with the head restraints removed. To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, press the lock release button and push the head restraint down. The head restraint is most effective when it is close to your head. Therefore, using a cushion on the seatback is not recommended. CAUTION D Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is closest to the top of your ears. D After adjusting the head restraint, make sure it is locked in position. D Do not drive with the head restraints removed. 98 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT TRUNK STORAGE EXTENSION " 1 Lock 2 Unlock 3 Open Pull down the center armrest in the rear seat. Push down the handle and open the armrest door. Access to the trunk can be prevented by locking the armrest door with the master key. TILT STEERING WHEEL To change the steering wheel angle, hold the steering wheel, pull up the lock release lever, tilt the steering wheel to the desired angle and release the lever. When the steering wheel is in a low position, it will spring up as you release the lock release lever. See “Luggage stowage precautions” on page 81 for precautions to observe in loading luggage. CAUTION CAUTION D Do not adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries. Be sure to close the door when the trunk storage extension is not in use. Luggage or cargo in the trunk may be thrown into the passenger compartment in a sudden stop or crash resulting in injury. D After adjusting the steering wheel, try moving it up and down to make sure it is locked in position. 99 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT POWER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS When you set your driving position: 1. Set the parking brake firmly. 2. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 3. Adjust the seat position and steering wheel angle properly. (See pages 95 and 99.) 4. Move the pedals toward you until you can fully depress the brake pedal. 5. After adjusting, depress the pedals a few times to get used to the feel. To adjust the position of the accelerator and brake pedals, push the switch. CAUTION The ignition key must be in the “ON” position with the automatic transmission selector lever in the “P” position. D Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while the pedals are moving. It may cause racing of the engine or sudden acceleration. To move the pedals toward the front of the vehicle: Push the “ ” side of the switch. To move the pedals back toward you: Push the “ ” side of the switch. D Make sure that you can fully depress the brake pedal before driving. Otherwise, you may not be able to hold down the brake pedal firmly in an emergency stop. The accelerator and brake pedals will move simultaneously. 100 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRRORS When you push the rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch, the heater panels in the outside rear view mirrors will quickly clear the mirror surface. (See “Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch” on page 39.) CAUTION D Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries. Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the side of your vehicle in the mirror. D Since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch them when the rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch is on. Be careful when judging the size or distance of any object seen in the outside rear view mirror on the passenger’s side. It is a convex mirror with a curved surface. Any object seen in a convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than if seen in a normal flat mirror. When the inside rear view mirror darkens in AUTO mode, the outside rear view mirrors also darken to reduce the reflection of the headlights of the following vehicle. For details, see “Inside rear view mirror” on page 103. 101 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT Power rear view mirror control Folding rear view mirrors " 1 Control switch To fold the rear view mirror, push backward. 2 Master switch To adjust the power rear view mirror, first place the master switch at “L” (left) or “R” (right), and push the control switch on the desired side. The rear view mirrors can be folded backward for parking in restricted areas. The power rear view mirror can be adjusted when the key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position. CAUTION NOTICE If ice should jam the mirror, do not operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de−icer to free the mirror. 102 Do not drive with the mirrors folded backward. Both the driver and passenger side rear view mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving. COMFORT ADJUSTMENT INSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR When the outside air temperature is low, it may take a little longer for the mirror to darken in response to the detection of headlights. CAUTION Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries. Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the rear of your vehicle in the mirror. Pushing the “MIRROR” switch changes the mode between AUTO and DAY. The indicator comes on when the AUTO mode is selected. DAY mode: The mirror surface is normal. AUTO mode: If the mirror detects light from the headlights of the vehicle behind you, the mirror surface darkens slightly to reduce the reflected light. When the inside rear view mirror surface changes, the outside rear view mirror surfaces will also become darker. To ensure correct functioning of an anti−glare mirror sensor located on the back side of the mirror, do not touch or cover the sensor with your finger or a piece of cloth, etc. When the ignition key is inserted and turned on, the inside rear view mirror always turns on in the AUTO mode. 103 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT Compass Displays Directions N NE E SE S SW W NW North Northeast East Southeast South Southwest West Northwest The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions: The compass indicates the direction in which the vehicle is heading. The illustration shown above indicates the vehicle is heading north. Push the “COMP” switch to turn the compass system on and off. If the ignition switch was turned off with the system on, the system will automatically turn back on when the ignition switch is turned on. D The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning. The compass does not adjust while the vehicle is stopped. D The ignition switch is turned off immediately after turning. D The vehicle is on an inclined surface. D The vehicle is in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground parking, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof parking, near a crossing, near a large vehicle, etc.). D The vehicle is magnetized. (There is a magnet or a metal object on or near the inside rear view mirror.) D The battery has been disconnected. 104 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT Your vehicle is out of the set zone. Refer to the “Calibrating the compass” in this section to set the zone number. The compass works to calibrate the direction automatically while the vehicle is in motion, if deviation is small. For additional precision or for complete calibrating, see “Calibrating the compass” below. If the direction is not indicated or the system does not operate properly, contact your Lexus dealer. Calibrating the compass (deviation calibration) The direction display on the compass deviates from the true direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The angle of deviation varies according to the geographic position of the vehicle. To adjust this deviation, stop the vehicle, then push and hold the “COMP” switch until the zone number appears on the display. Then push the “COMP” switch, referring to the following map to select the number of the zone where the vehicle is. "Compass sensor NOTICE Do not put magnets or a metal object on or near the inside rear view mirror of the vehicle. Doing so may cause malfunction of the compass sensor in the mirror. 105 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT CAUTION Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped. Calibrating the compass (circling calibration) 16R198 To rectify the compass, stop the vehicle and push and hold the “COMP” switch until “C” appears on the display. There is also a case that “C” appears on the display in case of the drastic change of the magnetic field. "Zone number Leaving the system after the calibration for several seconds, the direction will appear on the display. It shows the zone number is set. 106 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT Perform circling calibration just after you have purchased your Lexus. And then always perform circling calibration after the battery has been removed, replaced or disconnected. D Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground parking, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof parking, near a crossing, near a large vehicle, etc.). Drive the vehicle slowly (at 8 km/h (5 mph) or lower) in a circle until the direction is displayed. If there is not enough space to drive in a circle, drive around the block until the direction is displayed. After driving in 1 to 3 circles in the above method, calibration is complete with the direction shown on the display. D During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration. CAUTION D When doing the circling calibration, be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration. D Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped. 107 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT SEAT BELTS Seat belt precautions Lexus strongly urges that the driver and passengers in the vehicle be properly restrained at all times with the seat belts provided. Failure to do so could increase the chance of injury and/or the severity of injury in accidents. Injured person. Lexus recommends the use of a seat belt. Depending on the injury, first check with your doctor for specific recommendations. The seat belts provided for your vehicle are designed for people of adult size, large enough to properly wear them. CAUTION Child. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint” on page 133 for details. If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the rear seat and must be restrained using the vehicle’s seat belt. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. If a child must sit in the front seat, the seat belts should be worn properly. Do not let the child sit on your lap. It does not provide sufficient restraint. If an accident occurs and the seat belts are not worn properly, the force of the rapid inflation of the airbag may cause death or serious injury to the child. Do not allow the child to stand up or kneel on either rear or front seats. An unrestrained child could suffer serious injury or death during emergency braking or a collision. 108 Pregnant woman. Lexus recommends the use of a seat belt. Ask your doctor for specific recommendations. The lap belt should be worn securely and as low as possible over the hips and not on the waist. Persons should ride in their seats properly wearing their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer serious bodily injury or death in the event of sudden braking or a collision. When using the seat belts, observe the following: D Use the belt for only one person at a time. Do not use a single belt for two or more people − even children. D Avoid reclining the seatbacks too much. The seat belts provide maximum protection when the seatbacks are in the upright position. (See “Adjusting seatback angle” on page 96.) D Be careful not to damage the belt webbing or hardware. Take care that they do not get caught or pinched in the seat or doors. COMFORT ADJUSTMENT D Inspect the belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Damaged parts should be replaced. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Fastening front and rear seat belts D Keep the belts clean and dry. If they need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Never use bleach, dye, or abrasive cleaners − they may severely weaken the belts. (See “Cleaning the interior” on page 359 for instructions.) D Replace the belt assembly (including bolts) if it has been used in a severe impact. The entire assembly should be replaced even if damage is not obvious. Adjust the seat as needed and sit up straight and well back in the seat. To fasten your belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert the tab into the buckle. You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle. The seat belt length automatically adjusts to your size and the seat position. The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It also may lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend, and you can move around freely. 109 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and is then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system securely. (For details, see “Child restraint” on page 133.) To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the retractor, firmly pull the belt and release it. You will then be able to smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor. CAUTION Adjust the position of the lap and shoulder belts. D After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the belt is not twisted. 1 Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips − not on your waist. D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent you from properly latching the tab and buckle. 2 Adjust it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulder portion upward through the latch plate. D If the seat belt does not function normally, immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use the seat until the seat belt is fixed. It cannot protect an adult occupant or your child from injury. CAUTION D Both high−positioned lap belts and loose−fitting belts could cause serious injuries due to sliding under the lap belt during a collision or other unintended result. Keep the lap belt positioned as low on hip as possible. D For your safety, do not place the shoulder belt under your arm. 110 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT "Front seat belts only Adjust the shoulder anchor position to your size. To raise the anchor position, push the anchor up. To lower the anchor position, support the anchor while you push the lock release button then slide the anchor down. After the adjustment, make sure the anchor is locked in position. To release the belt, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract. If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it out and check for kinks or twists. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts. CAUTION Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause severe injuries in a collision. 111 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT Seat belt comfort guides CAUTION Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child’s neck, and should not fall off the child’s shoulder. Failure to observe these precautions could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt in an accident, causing death or serious injury. Seat belt extender The seat belt comfort guides are installed on the outside rear seats to relieve uncomfortableness from the shoulder belt when it is applied closer to a child’s neck (at the age of 10 or so), by pulling the shoulder belt a little forward. Slide the seat belt comfort guide forward to adjust the shoulder belt. The seat belt comfort guide should not be in the forward position for other purposes. If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because it is not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Lexus dealer free of charge. Please contact your local Lexus dealer so that the dealer can order the proper required length for the extender. Bring the heaviest coat you expect to wear for proper measurement and selection of length. Additional ordering information is available at your Lexus dealer. CAUTION When using the seat belt extender, observe the following precautions. Failure to follow these instructions could result in less effectiveness of the seat belt restraint system in case of vehicle accident, increasing the chance of personal injury. D Never use the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without it. 112 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT D Remember that the extender provided for you may not be safe when used on a different vehicle, or for another person or at a different seating position than the one originally intended for. CAUTION D After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the belt is not twisted. D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent you from properly latching the tab and buckle. D If the seat belt does not function normally, immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use the seat until the seat belt is fixed. It cannot protect an adult occupant or your child from injury. To connect the extender to the seat belt, insert the tab into the seat belt buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on the buckle release buttons of the extender and the seat belt are both facing outward as shown. You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle. When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt. This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and extender itself. When not in use, remove the extender and store in the vehicle for future use. 113 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT Front seat belt pretensioners The driver and front passenger’s seat belt pretensioners are designed to be activated in response to a severe frontal impact. When the airbag sensor detects the shock of a severe frontal impact, the front seat belts are quickly drawn back in by the retractors so that the belts snugly restrain the front seat occupants. The front seat belt pretensioners are activated even with no passenger in the front seat. 114 This indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This means the front seat belt pretensioners are operating properly. This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on page 50 for instructions.) COMFORT ADJUSTMENT CAUTION Do not modify, remove, strike or open the front seat belt pretensioner assemblies, airbag sensor or surrounding area or wiring. Doing so may cause sudden operation of the front seat belt pretensioners or disable the system, which could result in death or serious injury. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injuries. Consult your Lexus dealer about any repairs and modifications. " 1 2 3 4 Front seat belt pretensioner assemblies SRS warning light Front airbag sensors Airbag sensor assembly The front seat belt pretensioner system mainly consists of the above components, and their locations are shown in the illustration. The front seat belt pretensioners are controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensor. When the front seat belt pretensioners are activated, an operating noise may be heard and a small amount of smoke−like gas may be released. This gas is harmless and does not indicate that a fire is occurring. NOTICE Do not perform any of the following changes without consulting your Lexus dealer. Such changes can interfere with proper operation of the front seat belt pretensioners in some cases. D Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile two−way radio, cassette tape player or compact disc player D Repairs on or near the front seat belt retractor assemblies D Modification of the suspension system D Modification of the front end structure Once the front seat belt pretensioners have been activated, the seat belt retractors remain locked. 115 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT D Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow, winches or any other equipment to the front end D Repair made on or near the front fenders, front end structure or console This front seat belt pretensioner system has a service reminder indicator to inform the driver of operating problems. If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the airbags or pretensioners. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle. D The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, or the light remains on. D The light comes on or flashes while driving. D If either front seat belt does not retract or cannot be pulled out due to a malfunction or activation of the relevant front seat belt pretensioner. 116 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT SRS AIRBAGS The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) airbags are designed to provide further protection for the driver, front passenger and rear outside passengers in addition to the primary safety protection provided by the seat belts. In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible: D The front of the vehicle (shaded in the illustration) was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the front seat belt pretensioners to operate. D Either front seat belt pretensioner assembly or surrounding area is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. "SRS front airbags In response to a severe frontal impact, the SRS front airbags work together with the seat belts to help reduce injury by inflating. The SRS front airbags help to reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s head or chest caused by directly hitting the steering wheel or dashboard. The front passenger airbag is activated even with no passenger in the front seat. 117 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which will record the use of the seat belt restraint system by the driver and front passenger when the SRS front airbags are inflated. Be sure to wear your seat belt properly. CAUTION The driver or front passenger who is too close to the steering wheel or dashboard during airbag deployment can be killed or seriously injured. Lexus strongly recommends that: "SRS side airbags D The front passenger sit as far back as possible from the dashboard. In response to a severe side impact, the SRS side airbags for the driver or front passenger work together with the seat belts to help reduce injury by inflating. The SRS side airbags help to reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s chest. D All vehicle occupants be properly restrained using the available seat belts. The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat is activated even with no passenger in the front seat. D The driver sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while still maintaining control of the vehicle. Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which will record the use of the seat belt restraint system by the driver and front passenger when the SRS side airbags are inflated. Be sure to wear your seat belt properly. 118 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT CAUTION SRS side airbags inflate with considerable force. To avoid potential death or serious injury when they inflate, the driver and front passenger must: D Wear their seat belts properly. D Remain properly seated with their back upright and against the seat at all times. "SRS curtain shield airbags for front and rear outside occupants In response to a severe side impact, the SRS curtain shield airbag on either side works together with the seat belts by inflating. The SRS curtain shield airbags help to reduce injuries mainly to the driver ’s head, front passenger’s head and rear outside passenger’s head. The SRS curtain shield airbag is activated even with no passenger in the front seat or rear seat. Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which will record the use of the seat belt restraint system by the driver and front passenger when the SRS curtain shield airbags are inflated. Be sure to wear your seat belt properly. 119 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT CAUTION The SRS curtain shield airbags inflate with considerable force. To avoid potential death or serious injury when they inflate, the driver, front passenger and rear outside passengers must: D Wear their seat belts properly. D Remain properly seated with their back upright and against the seat at all times. The indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This means the SRS airbags are operating properly. This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on page 50 for instructions.) 120 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if it is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in which the nose of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.). It is possible that in some collisions at the lower zone of airbag sensor detection and activation, the SRS airbags and seat belt pretensioners will not operate all together. For the safety of all occupants, always wear your seat belts properly. The SRS front airbag system is designed to activate in response to a severe frontal impact within the shaded area between the arrows in the illustration. The SRS front airbags will deploy if the severity of the impact is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision when impacting straight into a fixed barrier that does not move or deform. If the severity of the impact is below the above threshold level, the SRS front airbags may not deploy. 121 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT " 1 Collision from the rear 2 Vehicle rollover The SRS front airbags are not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−speed frontal collision. The SRS side and curtain shield airbags are designed to inflate when the passenger compartment gets a severe collision from the side. The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may rather not to activate in the impact in which the occupant wearing the seat belt correctly would not get serious injury. 122 " 1 Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment 2 Collision from the side at an angle The SRS side and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment as shown in the illustration. COMFORT ADJUSTMENT " 1 Collision from the front 2 Collision from the rear 3 Vehicle rollover " 1 Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard material 2 Falling into or jumping over a deep hole 3 Landing hard or vehicle falling The SRS side and curtain shield airbags are not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a front or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−speed side collision. The SRS airbags may deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration. 123 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT 16E406 " 1 Side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies 2 Airbag module for front passenger (airbag and inflator) 3 Side airbag modules (airbag and inflator) 4 Curtain shield airbag modules (airbag and inflater) 5 Curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies 6 SRS warning light 7 Airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator) 8 Driver’s seat position sensor 9 Driver’s seat belt buckle switch 10 Front airbag sensors 11 Airbag sensor assembly The SRS airbag system consists mainly of the above components, and their locations are shown in the illustration. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensor. 124 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT In a severe frontal impact, the front airbag sensors detect deceleration and the system triggers the front airbag inflators. In a severe side impact, the side and curtain shield airbag sensor and/or the curtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) the side and curtain shield airbag inflators and/or the curtain shield airbag inflator. At this time, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non−toxic gas to help restrain the forward or lateral motion of the occupants. When the SRS airbag operates, it produces a fairly loud noise and release some smoke and residue along with non−toxic gas. This does not indicate a fire. This gas is normally harmless; however, for those who have delicate skin, it may cause a minor skin irritation. Be sure to wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation. Deployment of the airbags happens in a fraction of a second, so the airbags must inflate with considerable force. While the system is designed to reduce serious injuries, it may also cause minor burns or abrasions and swelling. Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, dashboard, front seats, parts of the front and rear pillars and roof side) may be hot for several minutes, but the airbags themselves will not be hot. The airbags are designed to inflate only once. CAUTION D The SRS airbag system is designed only as a supplement to the primary protection of the driver side and front and rear outside passenger side seat belt systems. The front and rear outside seat occupants can be killed or seriously injured by the inflating airbags if they do not wear the available seat belts properly. During sudden braking just before a collision, an unrestrained driver, front passenger or rear outside passenger can move forward or sideways into direct contact with or close proximity to the airbag which may then deploy during the collision. To ensure maximum protection in an accident, the driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an accident reduces the chances of death or serious injury or being thrown out of the vehicle. For instructions and precautions concerning the seat belt system, see “Seat belts” on page 108. A crash severe enough to inflate the driver and front passenger airbags may break the windshield as the vehicle buckles. In vehicles with a front passenger airbag, the windshield may also be damaged by absorbing some of the force of the inflating airbag. 125 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT D Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by the deploying airbags. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seat is the safest for infants and children. For instructions concerning the installation of a child restraint system, see “Child restraint” on page 133. D Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat because the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child. 126 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT "Move seat fully back D A forward−facing child restraint system should be allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible, because the force of the deploying front passenger airbag could cause death or serious injury to the child. D Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean over the dashboard when the vehicle is in use, since the front airbags inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, you may be killed or seriously injured. Sit up straight and well back in the seat, and always use your seat belt properly. D Do not allow the child to lean against the front door or around the front door even if the child is seated in a child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, because the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child. D For instructions concerning the installation of a child restraint system, see “Child restraint” on page 133. 127 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT 128 D Do not lean against the door when the vehicle is in use, since the side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, you may be killed or seriously injured. Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child in the vehicle. D Do not get your head closer to the area where the side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, since these airbags inflate with considerable speed and force; you may be killed or seriously injured. Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child in the vehicle. D Sit up straight and well back in the seat, distributing your weight evenly in the seat. Do not apply excessive weight to the outer side of the front seats on vehicles with side airbags. D Do not allow a child to kneel on the passenger seat facing the passenger’s side door, since the side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured. COMFORT ADJUSTMENT D Do not allow a child to stand up or to kneel on the front passenger seat, since the front airbag inflates with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured. D Do not hold a child on your lap or in your arms. Use a child restraint system in the rear seat. For instructions concerning the installation of a child restraint system, see “Child restraint” on page 133. D Do not put objects or your pets on or in front of the dashboard or steering wheel pad that houses the front airbag system. They might restrict inflation or cause death or serious injury as they are projected rearward by the force of the deploying airbags. Likewise, the driver and front passenger should not hold objects in their arms or on their knees. 129 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT D Do not attach a cup holder or any other device or object on or around the door. When the side airbag inflates, the cup holder or any other device or object will be thrown with great force, or the side airbag may not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious injury. Likewise, the driver and front passenger should not hold objects in their arms or on their knees. D Do not attach a microphone or any other device or object around the part where the curtain shield airbag activates such as on the windshield glass, side door glass, front and rear pillars and roof side or assist grips. When the curtain shield airbag inflates, the microphone or other device or object will be hurled with great force or the curtain shield airbag may not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious injury. D Do not hook a hanger, heavy or sharp pointed objects on the coat hook. If the curtain shield airbag inflates, those items will be hurled away with great force or the curtain shield airbag may not activate correctly. When you hang clothes, hang them on the coat hook directly. 130 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT D Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, causing death or serious injury. D Do not modify or remove any wiring. Do not modify, remove, strike or open any components, such as the steering wheel pad, steering wheel, column cover, front passenger airbag cover or airbag sensor assembly. Doing so may cause sudden front airbags inflation or disable the system, which could result in death or serious injury. D Do not modify or replace the seats or upholstery of front seats with side airbags. Such changes may disable the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury. D Do not disassemble or repair the front and rear pillars and roof side rail containing the curtain shield airbags. Such changes may disable the system or cause the curtain shield airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury. NOTICE Do not perform any of the following changes without consulting your Lexus dealer. Such changes can interfere with proper operation of the SRS in some cases. D Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile two−way radio, cassette tape player or compact disc player D Modification of the suspension system D Modification of the front end structure and side structure of the passenger compartment D Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow, winches or any other equipment to the front end D Repairs made on or near the front fenders, front end structure, console, steering column, steering wheel, dashboard near the front passenger airbag or front seats Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury. Consult your Lexus dealer about any repairs and modifications. 131 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT This SRS airbag system has an indicator to inform the driver of operating problems. If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the airbags. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle. 16E470 D When the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, the light does not come on, stays on or flashes. D The light comes on or starts flashing while driving. If the light stays on, it indicates that the SRS front airbags have a problem. If the light flashes, the SRS side and curtain shield airbags have a problem. In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible: D Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated. D The front of the vehicle and portion of the doors (shaded in the illustration) were involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS airbags to inflate. 132 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT D The surface of the seats with the side airbags or the pad section of the steering wheel or front passenger airbag cover (shaded in the illustration) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. D The portion of the front and rear pillars and roof side rail garnish (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside (shaded in the illustration) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. CHILD RESTRAINT Child restraint precautions Lexus strongly urges the use of child restraint systems for children small enough to use them. The laws of all fifty states in the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of a child restraint system. Your vehicle conforms to SAE J1819. NOTICE Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting your Lexus dealer. If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the rear seat and must be restrained using the vehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” on page 108 for details. CAUTION D For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on age and size. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior if you are unrestrained. D Lexus strongly urges use of a proper child restraint system which conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. 133 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT D Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front seat. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the airbag can cause death or serious injury if a rear−facing child restraint system is installed on the front seat. D Unless it is unavoidable, do not install a forward−facing child restraint system on the front seat. D A forward−facing child restraint system should be allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible, because the force of the deploying front passenger airbag could cause death or serious injury to the child. D Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. On vehicles with side airbags and curtain shield airbags, do not allow the child to lean over the front door or around the front door even if the child is seated in a child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, because the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child. Child restraint system A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must carefully consult the manufacturer ’s instructions which accompany the child restraint system. To provide proper restraint, use a child restraint system following the manufacturer ’s instructions about the appropriate age and size of the child for the child restraint system. Install the child restraint system correctly following the instructions provided by its manufacturer. General directions are also provided under the following illustrations. The child restraint system should be installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. CAUTION D Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front seat. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the airbag can cause death or serious injury if a rear−facing child restraint system is installed on the front seat. D Unless it is unavoidable, do not install a forward−facing child restraint system on the front seat. 134 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT D A forward−facing child restraint system should be allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible, because the force of the deploying front passenger airbag could cause death or serious injury to the child. D On vehicles with side airbags and curtain shield airbags, do not allow the child to lean over the front door or around the front door even if the child is seated in a child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, because the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child. D After installing the child restraint system, make sure it is secured in place according to the manufacturer’s instructions. If it is not restrained securely, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop or accident. Types of child restraint system Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types depending on the child’s age and size. (A) Infant seat (B) Convertible seat (C) Booster seat Install the child restraint system following the instructions provided by its manufacturer. Your vehicle has anchor brackets for securing the top strap of a child restraint system. For instructions about how to use the anchor bracket, see “Using a top strap” on page 147. The child restraint lower anchorages approved for your vehicle may also be used. See “Installation with child restraint lower anchorages” on page 150. (A) Infant seat When not using the child restraint system, keep it secured with the seat belt or place it in the trunk or somewhere other than in the passenger compartment. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident. 135 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT (B) Convertible seat INSTALLATION WITH 3−POINT TYPE SEAT BELT (A) Infant seat installation (C) Booster seat An infant seat is used in rear−facing position only. 136 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT CAUTION D Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat because the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child. D If the driver’s seat position does not allow sufficient space for safe installation, install the child restraint system on the rear right seat. 137 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT 1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the infant seat following the instructions provided by its manufacturer and inserting the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight. CAUTION D After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt are not twisted. D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent you from properly latching the tab and buckle. D If the seat belt does not function normally, immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use the child restraint system until the seat belt is fixed. It cannot protect your child from injury. 138 2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode. When the belt is then retracted even slightly, it cannot be extended. To hold the infant seat securely, make sure the belt is in the lock mode before letting the belt retract. COMFORT ADJUSTMENT 3. While pressing the infant seat firmly against the seat cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it will go to hold the infant seat securely. CAUTION Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer. 139 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT (B) Convertible seat installation 4. To remove the infant seat, press the buckle−release button and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older child passenger. 140 A convertible seat is used in forward−facing or rear−facing position depending on the age and size of the child. When installing, follow the manufacturer’s instructions about the applicable child’s age and size as well as directions for installing the child restraint system. COMFORT ADJUSTMENT "Move seat fully back CAUTION D Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat because the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child. D A forward−facing child restraint system should be allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible, because the force of the deploying front passenger airbag could cause death or serious injury to the child. D On vehicles with side airbags and curtain shield airbags, do not allow the child to lean over the front door or around the front door even if the child is seated in a child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, because the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child. 141 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT D If the driver’s seat position does not allow sufficient space for safe installation, install the child restraint system on the rear right seat. 1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the convertible seat following the instructions provided by its manufacturer and inserting the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight. CAUTION D After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt are not twisted. D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent you from properly latching the tab and buckle. D If the seat belt does not function normally, immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use the child restraint system until the seat belt is fixed. It cannot protect your child from injury. 142 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT 2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode. When the belt is then retracted slightly, it cannot be extended. To hold the convertible seat securely, make sure the belt is in the lock mode before letting the belt retract. 3. While pressing the convertible seat firmly against the seat cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it will go to hold the convertible seat securely. 143 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT CAUTION Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer. 144 4. To remove the convertible seat, press the buckle−release button and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older child passenger. COMFORT ADJUSTMENT (C) Booster seat installation "Move seat fully back A booster seat is used in forward−facing position only. CAUTION D A forward−facing child restraint system should be allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible, because the force of the deploying front passenger airbag could cause death or serious injury to the child. D On vehicles with side airbags and curtain shield airbags, do not allow the child to lean over the front door or around the front door even if the child is seated in a child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, because the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child. 145 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT D Both high−positioned lap belts and loose−fitting belts could cause serious injuries due to sliding under the lap belt during a collision or other unintended result. Keep the lap belt positioned as low on a child’s hips as possible. D For child’s safety, do not place the shoulder belt under child’s arm. D After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt are not twisted. 1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the booster seat and child following the instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle. Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly across the child’s shoulder and that the lap belt is positioned as low as possible on child’s hips. See “Seat belts” on page 108 for details. CAUTION D Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from child’s neck, but not falling off child’s shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause serious injuries in a collision. 146 D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent your child from properly latching the tab and buckle. D If the seat belt does not function normally, immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use the child restraint system until the seat belt is fixed. It cannot protect your child from injury. COMFORT ADJUSTMENT Using a top strap 2. To remove the child restraint system, press the buckle−release button and allow the belt to retract. Follow the procedure below for a child restraint system that requires the use of a top strap. 147 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT " 1 Anchor brackets 2 Symbol mark Use the anchor bracket on the package tray behind the rear seat to attach the top strap. TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET 1. Outside anchor brackets only—Remove the head restraint. Anchor brackets are installed for each rear seating position. This symbol indicates the locations of user ready anchor bracket. 2. Pull up the lid of the anchor bracket. 148 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT 3. Fix the child restraint system with the seat belt. 4. Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top strap. 5. Outside anchor brackets only—Replace the head restraint. For instructions to install the child restraint system, see “Child restraint system” on page 134. CAUTION D Make sure the top strap is securely latched, and check that the child restraint system is securely by pushing and pulling it in different directions. D Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer. 149 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT Installation with child restraint lower anchorages 16E499 The lower anchorages for the child restraint system interfaced with the FMVSS225 specification are installed in the rear seat. The anchorages are installed in the clearance between the seat cushion and seatback of both outside rear seats. Child restraint system interfaced with the FMVSS225 specification can be fixed with these anchorages. In this case, it is not necessary to fix the child restraint system with a seat belt on the vehicle. 150 "Type A COMFORT ADJUSTMENT CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM INSTALLATION Type A— 1. Widen the clearance between the seat cushion and seatback a little and confirm the position of the lower anchorages below the tag in the seatback. 2. Latch the hooks of lower straps onto the anchorages and tighten the lower straps. Type B— 1. Widen the clearance between the seat cushion and seatback a little and confirm the position of the lower anchorages below the tag in the seatback. 16E500 2. Latch the buckles onto the anchorages. If your child restraint system has a top strap, it should be anchored. (For the installation of the top strap, see “Using a top strap” on page 147.) For the installation details, refer to the instruction manual equipped with each product. "Type B 151 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT CAUTION D When using the lower anchorages for the child restraint system, be sure that there are no irregular objects around the anchorages or that the seat belt is not caught. D Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer. D Do not install a child restraint system on the rear seat if it interferes with the lock mechanism of the front seats. This can cause death or serious injury to the child and front passenger in case of sudden braking or a collision. DRIVING POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM The microcomputer can memorize the positions of the driver’s seat and outside rear view mirrors. Two different driving position profiles can be entered into the computer’s memory. Recording a driving position in the computer’s memory can only be done when the ignition key is in the “ON” position and the selector lever is in the “P” position. Setting the driving position 1. Adjust the driver’s seat and outside rear view mirrors to the desired position. 2. While pushing the “SET” button, push button “1” or “2” until the signal beeps. The beep sound means that the positions are recorded in the computer’s memory. 152 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT By repeating these two steps and pressing the remaining button, the driving position for another driver can be recorded. To set a new memorized position, select the desired position and perform step 2. The previous memory will be erased and the new position will be set. To make only slight changes to an already memorized position, the easiest way is to first activate the memorized position, then make the desired changes and perform step 2 above. Recalling the memorized position Conditions for memorized position activation D Ignition key “ON” and selector lever in “P” position. D Ignition switch off and within 30 seconds of opening driver’s door. If any driving position memory switch is pushed while one of the memorized driving position profiles is being activated, the operation will stop. To activate the system, push the desired button (“1” or “2”) again. The driving position memory control system cannot be operated while the vehicle is moving. If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, the computer’s memory will be erased and the memorized positions will have to be set again. CAUTION D Do not start the vehicle while the adjustments are being made. When you push button “1” or “2”, the driving position will be automatically adjusted to the position recorded for that button. D Take care not to select the wrong button, or the seat could strike the rear passenger or hit your body against the steering wheel. If this happens, you can stop the movement by pressing another driving position memory switch. 153 COMFORT ADJUSTMENT 154 SECTION 1–7 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Theft deterrent Theft deterrent system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Theft prevention labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 155 THEFT DETERRENT THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM "Security indicator light To deter theft of the vehicle, this system is designed to sound an alarm if any of the doors, trunk or hood is forcibly unlocked or the battery terminal is disconnected and then reconnected while the vehicle is locked. The alarm blows the horn intermittently and flashes the headlights, tail lights and turn signal lights. Further more when the interior light switch is in the “DOOR” position, the interior light turns on. After the alarm is activated, when you unlock any door using an ignition key or wireless remote control, the tail lights turn on for about 2 seconds to inform you that the system was activated. Setting the system 1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK” position and remove it. The engine immobiliser system causes the indicator light to flash. 2. Close and lock all the doors, trunk and hood using an ignition key or wireless remote control. If you lock them with wireless remote control, the turn signal lights flash once. The flashing indicator light will remain on when all the doors, trunk and hood are closed and locked. 3. After 30 seconds, the indicator starts flashing and the system is set. 156 THEFT DETERRENT Cancelling the system Testing the system When you unlock any door or trunk using an ignition key or wireless remote control, the system is cancelled. 1. Open all the windows. If you unlock any door or trunk with wireless remote control, the turn signal lights flash twice. Activating the system The alarm sounds for 60 seconds if any of the following are operated: 2. Set the system as described above. The front doors should be locked with the ignition key or wireless remote control. Be sure to wait until the indicator light starts flashing. 3. Unlock one of the doors from the inside. The system should activate the alarm. D Unlocking any door or trunk without using an ignition key or wireless remote control 4. Unlock any of the doors with a key or the wireless remote control to cancel the system. D Opening the hood forcibly 5. Repeat this operation for the other doors and hood. D Reconnecting the battery When testing the hood, also check that the system is activated when the battery terminal is disconnected and then reconnected. If any door is unlocked and the ignition key is not in the ignition switch during the alarm sounding, the door is automatically locked. To stop the alarm: Use either of the following methods. D Unlock the door using an ignition key or wireless remote control. D Turn the ignition switch on. If the system does not work properly, have it checked by your Lexus dealer. NOTICE Disconnecting the battery may result in the erasure of information you have set in the computer memory. After reconnecting the battery, check that the memorized data has been retained. If it has been erased, input it into the computer once more. 157 THEFT DETERRENT THEFT PREVENTION LABELS (U.S.A. ONLY) Your new vehicle carries theft prevention labels which are approximately 56 mm (2.20 in.) by 16 mm (0.63 in.). The purpose of these labels is to reduce the incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles. The label is designed so that once it is applied to a surface, any attempt to remove it will result in destroying the integrity of the label. Transferring these labels intact from one part to another will be impossible. NOTICE You should not attempt to remove the theft prevention labels as it may violate certain state or federal laws. 158 SECTION 2–1 AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO Air conditioning Automatic air conditioning controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 159 AIR CONDITIONING AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING CONTROLS 20E283 160 AIR CONDITIONING The automatic air conditioning automatically maintains the set temperature. In the automatic operation mode, the air conditioning selects the most suitable fan speed, air flow, air intake and on−off the air conditioning according to the temperature. The ignition key must be in the “ON” position. NOTICE To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the air conditioning on longer than necessary when the engine is not running. 1 “TEMP” (driver side temperature control) button 2 Driver side temperature display (in degrees Fahrenheit or Centigrade) 3 Fan speed display 4 Outside temperature display 5 Air flow display 6 Passenger side temperature display (in degrees Fahrenheit or Centigrade) 7 “PASSENGER TEMP” (passenger side temperature control) button 8 “DUAL” (temperature setting mode change) button 9 Windshield air flow button 10 “MODE”(air flow control) button 11 Air intake control button 12 Fan speed control button 13 “OFF” button 14 “AUTO” button 15 “A/C” button 161 AIR CONDITIONING 20E395 "Air flow selection 162 AIR CONDITIONING (a) Climate control SETTING OPERATION − automatic control 2. Use the “TEMP” or “PASSENGER TEMP” button to set the desired temperature. 1. Push the “AUTO” button. An indicator light will illuminate to show that the automatic operation mode has been selected. Air flow quantity, switching of the diffusers, on−off of the air conditioning and switching of the air intake between RECIRCULATED AIR and OUTSIDE AIR are automatically adjusted. The operation status is shown by each indicator. When one of the manual control buttons is depressed while operating in automatic mode, the operation corresponding to the button depressed is set. Other conditions continue to be adjusted automatically. Push the “OFF” button to turn the air conditioning system off. The “TEMP” or “PASSENGER TEMP” button is used to set the desired temperature. The temperature will be controlled on the driver and passenger sides simultaneously or individually. “TEMP” button—Changes the temperature on the driver and passenger sides simultaneously or the driver side only. “PASSENGER TEMP” button—Changes the temperature on the passenger side only. “DUAL” button—Changes the mode of the temperature setting. The indicator on the “DUAL” button has two modes: D With the indicator on—For individual temperature setting D With the indicator off—For simultaneous temperature setting 163 AIR CONDITIONING SETTING OPERATION − manual control When one of the manual control buttons is depressed while operating in automatic mode, the mode relevant to the depressed button is set. Other conditions continue to be adjusted automatically. If manual air flow selection is desired − 20E396 The outlets from which air is delivered can be selected manually by pushing the button. The function of each mode is as follows: Driver side setting Passenger side setting Mixed setting 164 1 Panel − Air flows mainly from the instrument panel vents. 2 Bi−level − Air flows from both the floor vents and the instrument panel vents. 3 Floor − Air flows mainly from the floor vents. 4 Floor/Windshield − Air flows mainly from the floor vents and windshield vents. AIR CONDITIONING If quick heating or cooling is desired − If manual switching of air intake is desired − Push the “TEMP” or “PASSENGER TEMP” button on either side and hold it until “MAX. HOT” or “MAX. COLD” appears on the display. If manual fan speed control is desired − The air intake control button is used to switch the air intake between the OUTSIDE AIR mode and RECIRCULATED AIR mode. " 1 Fan speed at low 2 Fan speed at high The fan speed can be set to your desired speed by pushing the appropriate side of fan speed control button. The higher the fan speed is, the more air is delivered. Pushing the “OFF” button turns off the fan. To remove exterior windshield frost, use the high speed setting. To turn the air source to the RECIRCULATED AIR mode, press the button. The indicator will come on. To turn the air source to OUTSIDE AIR mode, press the button again. The indicator will go off. To prevent fogging up of the windshield, the air intake mode may change automatically to the OUTSIDE AIR mode depending on the condition of the air conditioning system. For example, when the ambient temperature is low, the air intake mode may change automatically to the OUTSIDE AIR mode. This is not a malfunction. If quick circulation of cooled air is desired, push the air intake control button for RECIRCULATED AIR. The indicator light will come on. 165 AIR CONDITIONING For normal use, it is best to keep the air intake control button set to OUTSIDE AIR mode. If recirculated air is used during heating, the windows will fog up more easily. (b) Windshield defogging and defrosting If manual on−off of the air conditioning is desired − Push the “A/C” button to turn the air conditioning on and push it again to turn the air conditioning off. The air conditioning does not work if the outside temperature is lowered down to around 0_C (32_F). If the system is used for ventilation, heating in dry weather or removing frost or exterior fog on the windshield, turn the air conditioning off once it is no longer required. This will improve fuel economy. The air conditioning can be used for year−round automatic temperature control including cooling and dehumidifying operation. To remove interior fog on the windshield − Push the windshield air flow button. If the air conditioning compressor does not operate, the indicator of the “A/C” button will blink. If the indicator of the “A/C” button blinks even when the “A/C” button is pushed again, have the compressor checked by your nearest Lexus dealer. To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield − Displaying the outside temperature − 3. Push the fan speed control button on the right side to obtain a maximum air flow. The temperature display ranges from −30_C (−22_F) up to 50_C (122_F). 4. Leave the “A/C” button off. 1. Push the “TEMP” button to set the maximum temperature. 2. Push the windshield air flow button. When the windshield air flow button is pushed, air flows mainly from the windshield vents and turns on the defogging function with the purpose of clearing the front view. Pushing this button once again returns the air flow mode to the last one used. 166 AIR CONDITIONING This button allows the air intake to select OUTSIDE AIR mode automatically. This is to clean up the front view more quickly. If you want to return the setting to RECIRCULATED AIR mode, push the air intake control button once again. Push the “A/C” button for dehumidified heating or cooling. This setting clears the front view more quickly. CAUTION Do not use the windshield air flow button during cooled air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up blocking your vision. (c) Operating tips D To help cool down the interior after parking in the hot sun, drive for the first few minutes with the windows open. After the excess heat has blown away, close the windows. D Make sure the air inlet grilles in front of the windshield are not blocked by leaves or other obstructions. D If air flow control is not satisfactory, check the side vents and rear vents. (See “(d) Side vents and rear vents”.) D On humid days, do not blow cold air on the windshield. The windshield could fog up because of the difference in air temperature on the inside and outside of the windshield. D Keep the area under the front seats clear to allow air to circulate throughout the vehicle. D On cold days, set the fan speed to high for a minute to help clear the intake ducts of snow or moisture. This can reduce the amount of fogging on the windows. D When driving on dusty roads, close all windows. If dust thrown up by the vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after closing the windows, it is recommended that the air intake be set to the OUTSIDE AIR mode and the fan speed to any setting except “OFF”. 167 AIR CONDITIONING D If following another vehicle on a dusty road, or driving in windy and dusty conditions, it is recommended that the air intake be temporarily set to the RECIRCULATED AIR mode, which will close off the outside passage and prevent outside air and dust from entering the vehicle interior. Heating For best results, set controls to: For automatic operation − Push in the “AUTO” button. Temperature − To the desired temperature Air intake − OUTSIDE AIR Air conditioning − OFF For manual operation − Fan speed − To the desired fan speed Temperature − Towards high temperature Air intake − OUTSIDE AIR Air flow − FLOOR Air conditioning − OFF D For quick heating, select RECIRCULATED AIR for a few minutes. To keep the windows from fogging, select OUTSIDE AIR after the vehicle interior has been warmed. D Push the “A/C” button on for dehumidified heating. D Choose floor/windshield air flow to heat the vehicle interior while defrosting or defogging the windshield. 168 Air conditioning For best results, set controls to: For automatic operation − Push in the “AUTO” button. Temperature − To the desired temperature Air intake − OUTSIDE AIR Air conditioning − ON For manual operation − Fan speed − To the desired fan speed Temperature − Towards low temperature Air intake − OUTSIDE AIR Air flow − PANEL Air conditioning − ON D For quick cooling, select RECIRCULATED AIR for a few minutes. Ventilation For best results, set controls to: For automatic operation − Push in the “AUTO” button. Temperature − Towards low temperature Air intake − OUTSIDE AIR Air conditioning − OFF AIR CONDITIONING For manual operation − Fan speed − To the desired fan speed Temperature − Towards low temperature Air intake − OUTSIDE AIR Air flow − PANEL Air conditioning − OFF This button allows the air intake to select OUTSIDE AIR mode automatically. This is to clean up the front view more quickly. If you want to return the setting to RECIRCULATED AIR mode, push the air intake control button once again. Push the “A/C” button for dehumidified heating or cooling. This setting clears the front view more quickly. − The inside of the windshield D On humid days, do not blow cold air on the windshield − the difference between the outside and inside temperatures could make the fogging worse. For best results, set controls to: − The outside of the windshield For automatic operation − For best results, set controls to: Defogging and defrosting Temperature − Towards high temperature to heat; low temperature to cool Air intake − OUTSIDE AIR Air flow − WINDSHIELD For manual operation − Fan speed − To the desired fan speed Temperature − Towards high temperature to heat; low temperature to cool Air intake − OUTSIDE AIR Air flow − WINDSHIELD For automatic operation − Temperature − Towards high temperature Air intake − OUTSIDE AIR Air flow − WINDSHIELD For manual operation − Fan speed − To the desired fan speed Temperature − Towards high temperature Air intake − OUTSIDE AIR Air flow − WINDSHIELD When the windshield air flow button is pushed, air flows mainly from the windshield vents and turns on the defogging function with the purpose of clearing the front view. Pushing this button once again returns the air flow mode to the last one used. 169 AIR CONDITIONING When the windshield air flow button is pushed, air flows mainly from the windshield vents and turns on the defogging function with the purpose of clearing the front view. (d) Side vents and rear vents Pushing this button once again returns the air flow mode to the last one used. This button allows the air intake to select OUTSIDE AIR mode automatically. This is to clean up the front view more quickly. If you want to return the setting to RECIRCULATED AIR mode, push the air intake control button once again. Push the “A/C” button for dehumidified heating or cooling. This setting clears the front view more quickly. D To heat the vehicle interior while defrosting the windshield, choose floor/windshield air flow. "Side vents "Rear vents If air flow control is not satisfactory, check the side vents and rear vents. The side vents and rear vents may be opened or closed as shown. 170 AIR CONDITIONING (e) Checking and replacing the air conditioning filter 1. Open the glove box. Remove the screw with a Phillips−head screwdriver. The air conditioning filter is behind the glove box. The air conditioning filter may clog after long use. The filter may need to be replaced if the air flow of the air conditioner and heater experiences extreme reductions in operating efficiency, or if the windows become to fog up easily. To maintain the air conditioning efficiency, inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner ’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.) 2. Remove the 2 pins installed on the upper part of the glove box and lower the glove box. 171 AIR CONDITIONING INFORMATION The air conditioning filter should be installed properly in position. The use of air conditioning with the filter removed may cause deteriorated dustproof performance and then affect air conditioning performance. 3. Take out the filter case. 4. Remove the filter from the filter case. 5. Inspect the filter on the surface. If it is dirty, it should be replaced. 172 SECTION 2–2 AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO Audio Audio system (type A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Audio system (type B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 For vehicles equipped with Navigation System, please refer to the separate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. 173 AUDIO AUDIO SYSTEM (type A) Quick reference for your audio system 20E412 "You can adjust the brightness of the display. See “Instrument panel light control” on page 61 for details. 174 AUDIO 1 Ejecting a compact disc (See page 185 for details.) 2 Function buttons 1 − 6: Station selector buttons (See page 181 for details.) SCAN: Scan tuning (See page 182 for details.) P.SCAN:Preset scan tuning (See page 182 for details.) 3 Display of functions in TAPE or CD mode : DOLBY NR (See page 183 for details.) AA: Rewinding or reversing (See page 183 or 188 for details.) "": Fast forwarding (See page 183 or 188 for details.) RPT: Automatic repeat (See page 184 or 189 for details.) SKIP: Automatic skip of blank portions of tape (See page 184 for details.) : Disc selection (See page 187 for details.) RAND:Random access (See page 189 for details.) SCAN: Scan selection (See page 188 for details.) 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Compact disc slot (See page 185 for details.) Automatic sound levelizer/Mute (See page 177 or 179 for details.) TUNE/AUDIO CONTROL knob (See page 178 for details.) A " : Side change (See page 183 for details.) Mode selectors (See page 177 for details.) Stopping and ejecting a cassette tape (See page 182 for details.) Turning the system on and adjusting the volume (See page 176 for details.) Cassette tape slot (See page 182 for details.) Radio mode: Seek tuning (See page 181 for details.) TAPE mode: Direct access to a desired program (See page 184 for details.) CD mode: Direct access to a desired program (See page 188 for details.) 175 AUDIO Using your audio system: some basics (a) Turning the system on and off This section describes some of the basic features of the Lexus audio system. Some information may not pertain to your system. Your audio system adjusts to the optimum volume and tone quality automatically. While the system is adjusting the audio sound, the audio sound fades out and then fades in. Your audio system works when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position. NOTICE To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the car audio on longer than necessary when the engine is not running. 176 Push this knob to turn the audio system on and off. Turn this knob to adjust the volume. The system turns on in the last mode used. AUDIO Push the “MUTE” button to decrease the volume momentarily. Push the “AM”, “FM”, “TAPE” or “DISC” button to turn on that mode. The selected mode turns on directly. To return to its original volume, push the same button again. Push these buttons if you want to switch from one mode to another. When the audio system is turned on, the mute is always off regardless of the previous mode. If the tape or disc is not set, the cassette player or compact disc player does not turn on. You can turn off the cassette player by ejecting the cassette tape. If the audio system was previously off, then the entire audio system will be turned off when you eject the cassette tape. If another function was previously playing, it will come on again. 177 AUDIO In the “TAPE” or “CD” mode, the applicable functions are shown in the lowest part of the display. Push the switch just below to turn on each function. Each time you push the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob, the display changes as in the following. To adjust the tone and balance, turn the knob. (b) Tone and balance BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. How good an audio program sounds to you is largely determined by the mix of the treble, mid−range, and bass levels. In fact, different kinds of music and vocal programs usually sound better with different mixes of treble, mid−range and bass. MID: Adjusts mid−pitched tones. A good balance of the left and right stereo channels and of the front and rear sound levels is also important. BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between the right and left speakers. Keep in mind that if you are listening to a stereo recording or broadcast, changing the right/left balance will increase the volume of one group of sounds while decreasing the volume of another. 178 TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between the front and rear speakers. AUDIO (c) Automatic sound levelizer (e) Your cassette player When you insert a cassette, the exposed tape should face to the right. NOTICE Do not oil any part of the cassette player, and do not insert anything except a cassette tape into the slot. (f) Your compact disc player When the audio sound becomes difficult to be heard due to road noise, wind noise, etc. during driving, the system adjusts to the optimum volume and tone quality according to the noise level. While the automatic sound levelizer is on, “ASL” appears on the display. (d) Your radio antennas The wire antenna is mounted inside the rear window. NOTICE D When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the wire antenna. When you insert a disc, gently push it in with the label face up. (The player will automatically eject a disc if the label face is down.) The compact disc player will play from track 1 through the end of the disc. Then it will play from track 1 again. On models with the compact disc auto changer, next disc will be played from track 1. NOTICE D Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the compact disc player. Do not insert anything other than compact discs into the slot. D Do not insert a disc upon another one. The player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only. D Putting a window tint (especially, conductive or metallic type) on the rear window may affect the reception of radio or mobile telephone. For the installation of the window tint, consult with your Lexus dealer. 179 AUDIO Radio operation (a) Listening to the radio Turn this knob to the right to step up the station band or to the left to step down. Push these buttons to choose either an AM or FM station. “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” appears on the display. 180 Your radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a stereo broadcast is received. “ST” appears on the display. If the signal becomes weak, the radio reduces the amount of channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating noise. If the signal becomes extremely weak, the radio switches from stereo to mono reception. In this case, “ST” disappears from the display. AUDIO (b) Presetting a station (c) Selecting a station Tune in the desired station using one of the following methods. 1. Tune in the desired station. 2. Push one of the station selector buttons ( 1−6 ) and hold it until a beep is heard. This sets the station to the button and the button number ( 1−6 ) appears on the display. Each button can store one AM station and two FM stations. To change the preset station to a different one, follow the same procedure. The preset station memory is cancelled when the power source is interrupted by battery disconnection or a blown fuse. Seek tuning: Push the “SEEK” button. The radio will begin seeking up or down for a station of the nearest frequency and will stop on reception. Each time you push the button, the stations will be searched out one after another. Preset tuning: Push the button ( 1−6 ) for the station you want. The button number ( 1−6 ) and station frequency appear on the display. Manual tuning: Turn the “TUNE” knob. The radio will step up or down to another frequency. 181 AUDIO Cassette tape player operation (a) Playing a cassette tape To scan all the frequencies: Push the “SCAN” button briefly. “SCAN” appears on the display. The radio will find the next station up the band, stay there for a few seconds, and then scan again. To select a station, push the “SCAN” button a second time. To scan the preset stations: Push the “P.SCAN” button. “P.SCAN” appears on the display. The radio will tune in the next preset station up the band, stay there for a few seconds, and then move to the next preset station. To select a station, push the “P.SCAN” button a second time. When you insert a cassette tape, the exposed tape should face to the right. The player will automatically start when you insert a cassette tape. At this time, “TAPE” appears on the display. If a metal or chrome equivalent cassette tape is put in the cassette player, the player will automatically recognize it and “METAL” appears on the display. To stop or eject the cassette tape, push the “EJECT” button. Auto−reverse feature: After the cassette player reaches the end of a tape, it automatically reverses and begins to play the other side, regardless of whether the cassette was playing or fast forwarding. 182 AUDIO (b) Manual program selection If a cassette is already in the slot, push the “TAPE” button. Dolbyr Noise Reduction* feature: If you are listening to a tape that was recorded with Dolby* Noise Reduction, push the button by the double−D symbol. The display will indicate that the Dolby noise reduction system is on. “Program” button: Push the “ A " ” button to select the other side of a cassette tape. The display indicates which side is currently selected (“Y” indicates top side, “B” indicates bottom side). The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduction, play your tapes with the Dolby NR on or off according to the mode used for recording the tape. “Rewind” button: Push the “AA” button to rewind a tape. “REW” appears on the display. To play a tape recorded without Dolby NR, push the button again to turn off the Dolby NR. * Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the double−D are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing symbol Corporation. To stop rewinding, push the same button or “TAPE” button. “Fast forward” button: Push the “""” button to fast forward a cassette tape. “FF” appears on the display. To stop fast forwarding, push the same button or “TAPE” button. 183 AUDIO (c) Automatic program selection “RPT” button: The repeat feature automatically replays the current program. Push the “RPT” button while the program is playing. When the program ends, it will automatically be rewound and replayed. Push the button again to turn off the repeat feature. There must be at least 3 seconds of blank space between programs for the repeat feature to work correctly. “SKIP” button: The skip feature allows you to fast forward past long stretches of blank tape. This is especially useful at the end of cassettes. Push the “SKIP” button. The player will automatically skip any blank portions of 15 seconds or more and play the next program. To cancel it, push the button once again. 184 “Automatic program selection” button: The automatic program selection feature allows you to program your cassette player to skip forward or backward to locate the song you want to hear. You can skip up to 9 programs at a time. Push this button on the upper side to skip forward. “FF” and the number will appear on the display. Push the button until the number you want to skip appears on the display. After that, the player will automatically skip forward. When the end of the tape is reached, the player automatically reverses sides and resumes normal play. AUDIO Push this button on the lower side to skip backward. Push the button until “REW” and the number you want to skip appear on the display. Compact disc player operation D If you set “REW 1”, the player will rewind to the beginning of the current program. The ignition switch must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position. (a) Inserting or ejecting compact discs D When counting the number of programs you want to rewind, remember to count the current program as well. For example, if you want to rewind to a song that is two before the song you are listening to, push this button until “REW 3” appears on the display. When the beginning of the tape is reached, the player automatically resumes normal play. There must be at least 3 seconds of blank space between programs for this feature to work correctly. “RPT”, “SKIP” and “Automatic program selection” features: These features may not work well with some spoken word, live or classical recordings. D Setting a compact disc: Gently push a disc in with the label faces up. (The player will automatically eject a disc if the label faces down.) 185 AUDIO (b) Playing a compact disc D Ejecting a compact disc: Push the “EJECT” button for the compact disc. Push the “DISC” button if the disc is already loaded in the player. “CD” appears on the display. The discs set in the player are played continuously. The track number and the time from the beginning of the program appear on the display. When play of disc ends, the first track starts. WIth a compact disc changer only— Push the “DISC” button twice if the magazine is already loaded in the player. “CD1” appears on the display. The discs set in the magazine are played continuously. The disc number of the disc currently being played, the track number and the time from the beginning of the program appear on the display. 186 AUDIO When play of one disc ends, the first track of the following disc starts. When play of the final disc ends, play of the first disc starts again. (c) Selecting a desired disc (with a compact disc changer only) The player will skip any empty disc trays. Pushing the “DISC” button while playing a disc in the automatic changer will switch from the disc in the changer to the disc in the compact disc player. If you push the “DISC” button when the source is other than the compact disc, a disc in the compact disc player or automatic changer, whichever was previously used, will play. Push the “ ” or “ ” button to select the disc number. Push the button several times until the desired disc number appears on the display. When you release the button, the player will start playing the selected disc from the first track. 187 AUDIO (d) Searching for a desired track or disc (e) Selecting a desired track Searching for a desired track: “TRACK” button: Use for direct access to a desired track. Push the “SCAN” button briefly. “SCAN” will appear on the display. The compact disc player will play the next track for 10 seconds, then scan again. To select a track, push the “SCAN” button a second time. If the player reaches the end of the disc, it will continue scanning at track 1. Push either side of the “TRACK” button several times until the desired track number appears on the display. As you release the button, the player will start playing the selected track from the beginning. After all the tracks are scanned in one pass, normal play resumes. Searching for a desired disc (with a compact disc changer only): Push the “SCAN” button until you hear a beep. With “D.SCAN” on the display, the program at the beginning of each disc will be played for 10 seconds. To continue listening to the program of your choice, push the button a second time. After all the discs in the automatic changer are scanned in one pass, the scan function is cancelled. 188 “Fast forward” button: Push the “""” button and hold it to fast forward the disc. When you release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing from that position. “Reverse” button: Push the “AA” button and hold it to reverse the disc. When you release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing. AUDIO (f) Repeating a track or a disc (g) Random playing “RPT” button: There are 2 repeat features—you can either replay a disc track or a whole compact disc. “RAND” button: There are 2 random features — you can either listen to the tracks on all the compact discs in the player in random order, or only listen to the tracks on a specific compact disc in random order. Repeating a track: Push the “RPT” button briefly while the track is playing. “RPT” will appear on the display. When the track ends, it will automatically be replayed. This process will be continued until you push the button again to turn off the repeat feature. Repeating a disc (with a compact disc changer only): Push the “RPT” button and hold it until you hear a beep. “D.RPT” will appear on the display. The player will repeat all the tracks on the disc you are listening to. When the disc ends, the player will automatically go back to the top track of the disc and replay. This process will be continued until you push the button again to turn off the repeat feature. Random playing for the tracks on a disc: Push the “RAND” button briefly. “RAND” will appear on the display and play the disc you are listening to in random order. Random playing for all the tracks in the compact disc changer (with a compact disc changer only): Push the “RAND” button and hold it until you hear a beep. “D.RAND” will appear on the display and the player will perform all the tracks on all the discs in the automatic changer in random order. To turn off the random feature, push “RAND” a second time. When a track is skipped or the system is inoperative, push the button to reset. 189 AUDIO (h) If the player malfunctions Car audio system operating hints If the player or another unit equipped with the player malfunctions, your audio system will display one of the four following error messages. If “WAIT” appears on the display: It indicates that the inside of the player unit may be too hot due to the very high ambient temperature. Remove the disc from the player and allow the player to cool down. If “ERROR 1” appears on the display: It indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged, or it was inserted up−side down. Clean the disc or insert it correctly. If “ERROR 3” or “ERROR 4” appears on the display: It indicates there is a trouble inside the system. Eject the disc. If the malfunction is not rectified: Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer. NOTICE To ensure correct audio system operations: D Be careful not to spill beverages over the audio system. D Do not put anything other than a cassette tape or compact disc into the cassette tape slot or compact disc slot. D The use of a cellular phone inside or near the vehicle may cause a noise from the speakers of the audio system which you are listening to. However, this does not indicate a malfunction. Radio reception Usually, a problem with radio reception does not mean there is a problem with your radio − it is just the normal result of conditions outside the vehicle. For example, nearby buildings and terrain can interfere with FM reception. Power lines or telephone wires can interfere with AM signals. And of course, radio signals have a limited range. The farther you are from a station, the weaker its signal will be. In addition, reception conditions change constantly as your vehicle moves. Here are some common reception problems that probably do not indicate a problem with your radio: 190 AUDIO FM AM Fading and drifting stations − Generally, the effective range of FM is about 40 km (25 miles). Once outside this range, you may notice fading and drifting, which increase with the distance from the radio transmitter. They are often accompanied by distortion. Fading − AM broadcasts are reflected by the upper atmosphere − especially at night. These reflected signals can interfere with those received directly from the radio station, causing the radio station to sound alternately strong and weak. Multi−path − FM signals are reflective, making it possible for two signals to reach your antenna at the same time. If this happens, the signals will cancel each other out, causing a momentary flutter or loss of reception. Static and fluttering − These occur when signals are blocked by buildings, trees, or other large objects. Increasing the bass level may reduce static and fluttering. Station swapping − If the FM signal you are listening to is interrupted or weakened, and there is another strong station nearby on the FM band, your radio may tune in the second station until the original signal can be picked up again. Station interference − When a reflected signal and a signal received directly from a radio station are very nearly the same frequency, they can interfere with each other, making it difficult to hear the broadcast. Static − AM is easily affected by external sources of electrical noise, such as high tension power lines, lightening, or electrical motors. This results in static. Caring for your cassette player and tapes For the best performance for your cassette player and tapes: Clean the tape head and other parts regularly. D A dirty tape head or tape path can decrease sound quality and tangle your cassette tapes. The easiest way to clean them is by using a cleaning tape. (A wet type is recommended.) 191 AUDIO Use high−quality cassettes: Caring for your compact disc player and discs D Low−quality cassette tapes can cause many problems, including poor sound, inconsistent playing speed, and constant auto−reversing. They can also get stuck or tangled in the cassette player. D Your compact disc player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only. D Do not use a cassette if it has been damaged or tangled or if its label is peeling off. D Do not leave a cassette in the player if you are not listening to it, especially if it is hot outside. D Store cassettes in their cases and out of direct sunlight. D Avoid using cassettes with a total playing time longer than 100 minutes (50 minutes per side). The tape used in these cassettes is thin and could get stuck or tangled in the cassette player. D Extremely high temperature can keep your compact disc player from working. On hot days, use air conditioning to cool the vehicle interior before you listen to a disc. D Bumpy roads or other vibrations may make your compact disc player skip. D If moisture gets into your compact disc player, you may not hear any sound even though your compact disc player appears to be working. Eject all discs from the player and wait until the player dries. CAUTION Compact disc players use an invisible laser beam which could cause hazardous radiation exposure if directed outside the unit. Be sure to operate the player correctly. 192 AUDIO D Use only compact discs marked as shown above. The following products may not be playable on your compact disc player. "Special shaped discs Copy−protected CD CD−R (CD−Recordable) CD−RW (CD−Re−writable) CD−ROM "Low quality discs 193 AUDIO "Labeled discs "Correct NOTICE To prevent damage to the player or changer, do not use special shaped, low quality or labeled discs such as those shown in the illustrations. 194 "Wrong D Handle compact discs carefully, especially when you set them into the player. Hold them on the edge and do not bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints on them, particularly on the shiny side. D Dirt, scrapes, warping, pin holes, or other disc damage could cause the player to skip or to repeat a section of a track. (To see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the light.) AUDIO To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint−free cloth that has been dampened with water. Wipe in a straight line from the center to the edge of the disc (not in a circle). Do not use a conventional record cleaner or anti−static device. 195 AUDIO AUDIO SYSTEM (type B) Quick reference for your audio system 20E413 "You can adjust the brightness of the display. See “Instrument panel light control” on page 61 for details. If a Mark Levinson brand audio system is installed, the “Mark Levinson” logo is shown on the panel. 196 AUDIO 1 Ejecting a compact disc (See page 209 for details.) 2 Function buttons 1 − 6: Station selector buttons (See page 203 for details.) SCAN: Scan tuning (See page 203 for details.) MSG: Message button (See page 205 for details.) 3 Display of functions in TAPE or CD mode A " : Side change (See page 207 for details.) : DOLBY NR (See page 207 for details.) AA: Rewinding or reversing (See page 207 or 212 for details.) "": Fast forwarding (See page 207 or 212 for details.) RPT: Automatic repeat (See page 208 or 213 for details.) SKIP: Automatic skip of blank portions of tape (See page 208 for details.) : Disc selection (See page 211 for details.) RAND:Random access (See page 213 for details.) SCAN: Scan selection (See page 212 for details.) 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Compact disc slot (See page 209 for details.) Compact disc load button (See page 209 for details.) Radio data system/Program type (See page 204 for details.) TUNE/AUDIO CONTROL knob (See page 200 for details.) Traffic announcement (See page 205 for details.) Mode selectors (See page 199 for details.) Stopping and ejecting a cassette tape (See page 206 for details.) Turning the system on and adjusting the volume (See page 198 for details.) Cassette tape slot (See page 206 for details.) Radio mode: Seek tuning (See page 203 for details.) TAPE mode: Direct access to a desired program (See page 208 for details.) CD mode: Direct access to a desired program (See page 212 for details.) 197 AUDIO Using your audio system: some basics (a) Turning the system on and off This section describes some of the basic features of the Lexus audio system. Some information may not pertain to your system. Your audio system adjusts to the optimum volume and tone quality automatically. While the system is adjusting the audio sound, the audio sound fades out and then fades in. Your audio system works when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position. NOTICE To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the car audio on longer than necessary when the engine is not running. 198 Push this knob to turn the audio system on and off. Turn this knob to adjust the volume. The system turns on in the last mode used. AUDIO Push the “AM”, “FM”, “TAPE” or “DISC” button to turn on that mode. The selected mode turns on directly. Push these buttons if you want to switch from one mode to another. If the tape or disc is not set, the cassette player or compact disc player does not turn on. You can turn off the cassette player by ejecting the cassette tape. If the audio system was previously off, then the entire audio system will be turned off when you eject the cassette tape. If another function was previously playing, it will come on again. In the “TAPE” or “CD” mode, the applicable functions are shown in the lowest part of the display. Push the switch just below to turn on each function. (b) Tone and balance How good an audio program sounds to you is largely determined by the mix of the treble, mid−range, and bass levels. In fact, different kinds of music and vocal programs usually sound better with different mixes of treble, mid−range and bass. A good balance of the left and right stereo channels and of the front and rear sound levels is also important. Keep in mind that if you are listening to a stereo recording or broadcast, changing the right/left balance will increase the volume of one group of sounds while decreasing the volume of another. 199 AUDIO (c) Your radio antennas The wire antenna is mounted inside the rear window. NOTICE D When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the wire antenna. Each time you push the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob, the display changes as in the following. To adjust the tone and balance or turn on or off the automatic sound levelizer, turn the knob. BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. D Putting a window tint (especially, conductive or metallic type) on the rear window may affect the reception of radio or mobile telephone. For the installation of the window tint, consult with your Lexus dealer. (d) Your cassette player When you insert a cassette, the exposed tape should face to the right. MID: Adjusts mid−pitched tones. TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between the front and rear speakers. BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between the right and left speakers. ASL: Turns on or off the automatic sound levelizer. Automatic sound levelizer: When the audio sound becomes difficult to be heard due to road noise, wind noise, etc. during driving, the system adjusts to the optimum volume and tone quality according to the noise level. While the automatic sound levelizer is on, “ASL” appears on the display. 200 NOTICE Do not oil any part of the cassette player, and do not insert anything except a cassette tape into the slot. AUDIO (e) Your compact disc player with changer Radio operation (a) Listening to the radio Your compact disc player with changer can store up to 6 discs and play selected discs or continuously play all the discs set in the player. When you set discs into the player, make sure their labels face up. If not, the player will display “ERROR 1” and the disc number. Push these buttons to choose either an AM or FM station. “AM”, “FM1”, “FM2” or “FM TYPE” appears on the display. NOTICE D Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the compact disc player. Do not insert anything other than compact discs into the slot. D Do not insert a disc upon another one. The player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only. 201 AUDIO (b) Presetting a station Turn this knob to the right to step up the station band or to the left to step down. Your radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a stereo broadcast is received. “ST” appears on the display. If the signal becomes weak, the radio reduces the amount of channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating noise. If the signal becomes extremely weak, the radio switches from stereo to mono reception. In this case, “ST” disappears from the display. 1. Tune in the desired station. 2. Push one of the station selector buttons ( 1−6 ) and hold it until a beep is heard. This sets the station to the button and the button number ( 1−6 ) appears on the display. Each button can store one AM station and two FM stations. To change the preset station to a different one, follow the same procedure. The preset station memory is cancelled when the power source is interrupted by battery disconnection or a blown fuse. 202 AUDIO (c) Selecting a station Tune in the desired station using one of the following methods. Seek tuning: Push the “SEEK” button. The radio will begin seeking up or down for a station of the nearest frequency and will stop on reception. Each time you push the button, the stations will be searched out one after another. Preset tuning: Push the button ( 1−6 ) for the station you want. The button number ( 1−6 ) and station frequency appear on the display. To scan all the frequencies: Push the “SCAN” button briefly. “SCAN” appears on the display. The radio will find the next station up the band, stay there for a few seconds, and then scan again. To select a station, push the “SCAN” button a second time. To scan the preset stations: Push the “SCAN” button until you hear a beep. “P.SCAN” appears on the display. The radio will tune in the next preset station up the band, stay there for a few seconds, and then move to the next preset station. To select a station, push the “SCAN” button a second time. Manual tuning: Turn the “TUNE” knob. The radio will step up or down to another frequency. 203 AUDIO (d) RDS (Radio Data System) TYPE (Program type): When you push the “TYPE” button while receiving an RDS station, the current program type appears on the display. Each time you push the “TYPE” button, the program type changes as in the following: D ROCK D EASY LIS (Easy listening) D CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and jazz) D R&B (Rhythm and Blues) D INFORM (Information) When you push the “RDS” button briefly during FM reception, the RDS turns on. “RDS” and “RDS SEARCH” appear on the display and the radio starts to search RDS stations. D RELIGION If no RDS stations can be found, “NOTHING” appears and the display returns to the previous mode. D ALERT (Emergency message) If RDS stations are found, “FOUND **ST” appears on the display (** indicating the number of stations which are found) in the FM TYPE mode and the RDS stations are preset by program type. To turn off the RDS, push the “RDS” button until you hear a beep. 204 D MISC AUDIO TRAF (Traffic) function: A station that regularly broadcasts traffic information is automatically located. Radio text message: When you push the “TRAF” button, “TRAF SEEK” appears on the display and the radio will start seeking any traffic program station. If no traffic program station is found, “NO TRAF INFO” appears on the display for a few seconds and the display returns to the previous mode. If the radio receives a radio text message during FM reception, “MSG” and a text message appears on the display. After the text message goes off, “MSG” also goes off. After the text message goes off from the display, pushing the “MSG” button during message reception shows the text message again on the display. The RDS audio system can store three messages consisting of 64 characters in memory. To store a message in memory, push the “MSG” button until you hear a beep. If three messages are already stored in memory, the oldest message will be overwritten by the new message. 205 AUDIO To recall a radio text message, push the “MSG” button. Each time you push the button, the available message will be displayed beginning with the newest one. Cassette tape player operation (a) Playing a cassette tape If there is no radio text message in memory and when no message is received, “NO MSG STORED” appears on the display. After this, the display returns to the previous mode. When you insert a cassette tape, the exposed tape should face to the right. The player will automatically start when you insert a cassette tape. At this time, “TAPE” appears on the display. If a metal or chrome equivalent cassette tape is put in the cassette player, the player will automatically recognize it and “METAL” appears on the display. To stop or eject the cassette tape, push the “EJECT” button. Auto−reverse feature: After the cassette player reaches the end of a tape, it automatically reverses and begins to play the other side, regardless of whether the cassette was playing or fast forwarding. 206 AUDIO (b) Manual program selection If a cassette is already in the slot, push the “TAPE” button. Dolbyr Noise Reduction* feature: If you are listening to a tape that was recorded with Dolby* Noise Reduction, push the button by the double−D symbol. The display will indicate that the Dolby noise reduction system is on. “Program” button: Push the “ A " ” button to select the other side of a cassette tape. The display indicates which side is currently selected (“Y” indicates top side, “B” indicates bottom side). The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduction, play your tapes with the Dolby NR on or off according to the mode used for recording the tape. “Rewind” button: Push the “AA” button to rewind a tape. “REW” appears on the display. To play a tape recorded without Dolby NR, push the button again to turn off the Dolby NR. * Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the double−D are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing symbol Corporation. To stop rewinding, push the same button or “TAPE” button. “Fast forward” button: Push the “""” button to fast forward a cassette tape. “FF” appears on the display. To stop fast forwarding, push the same button or “TAPE” button. 207 AUDIO (c) Automatic program selection “RPT” button: The repeat feature automatically replays the current program. Push the “RPT” button while the program is playing. When the program ends, it will automatically be rewound and replayed. Push the button again to turn off the repeat feature. There must be at least 3 seconds of blank space between programs for the repeat feature to work correctly. “SKIP” button: The skip feature allows you to fast forward past long stretches of blank tape. This is especially useful at the end of cassettes. Push the “SKIP” button. The player will automatically skip any blank portions of 15 seconds or more and play the next program. To cancel it, push the button once again. 208 “Automatic program selection” button: The automatic program selection feature allows you to program your cassette player to skip forward or backward to locate the song you want to hear. You can skip up to 9 programs at a time. Push this button on the upper side to skip forward. “FF” and the number will appear on the display. Push the button until the number you want to skip appears on the display. After that, the player will automatically skip forward. When the end of the tape is reached, the player automatically reverses sides and resumes normal play. AUDIO Push this button on the lower side to skip backward. Push the button until “REW” and the number you want to skip appear on the display. Compact disc player operation D If you set “REW 1”, the player will rewind to the beginning of the current program. The ignition switch must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position. (a) Inserting or ejecting compact discs Your compact disc player with changer can store up to 6 discs. D When counting the number of programs you want to rewind, remember to count the current program as well. For example, if you want to rewind to a song that is two before the song you are listening to, push this button until “REW 3” appears on the display. When the beginning of the tape is reached, the player automatically resumes normal play. There must be at least 3 seconds of blank space between programs for this feature to work correctly. “RPT”, “SKIP” and “Automatic program selection” features: These features may not work well with some spoken word, live or classical recordings. D Setting a single compact disc: 1. Push the “LOAD” button briefly. The green indicators of the slot start blinking and “WAIT” appears on the display. After the blinking indicators stay on and “WAIT” changes to “LOAD”, the CD door opens. 2. Insert only one disc while the CD door is open. You can set a disc at the lowest empty disc number. After insertion, the set disc is automatically loaded. If the label faces down, the disc cannot be played. In this case, “ERROR 1” and disc number appear on the display. 209 AUDIO If you need to insert the next disc, repeat the same procedure to insert another disc. D Setting all the discs: 1. Push the “LOAD” button until you hear a beep. The green indicators of the slot start blinking and “WAIT” appears on the display. After the blinking indicators stay on and the “WAIT” changes to the “LOAD”, the CD door opens. 2. Insert only one disc while the CD door is open. The CD door closes and “WAIT” appears again. 3. Insert the next disc after the “WAIT” changes to the “LOAD” and the CD door opens. 4. Repeat this procedure until you insert all the discs. 1. Push the “ ” or “ ” button to display the disc number you want to eject. To cancel the operation, push the “LOAD” or “DISC” button. 2. Push the “EJECT” button for the compact disc briefly. If you do not insert discs within 15 seconds after pushing the “LOAD” button and “LOAD” is displayed, the operation will be canceled automatically. At this time, the display shows “EJECT” and the indicators at both ends of the slot as well as disc number light up. NOTICE Push the “EJECT” button for the compact disc until you hear a beep. Do not insert one disc stacked on top of another one or feed them in continuously, to prevent discs from getting stuck in the player. 210 D Ejecting a single disc alone: D Ejecting all the discs: AUDIO (b) Playing a compact disc (c) Selecting a desired disc Push the “DISC” button if the discs are already loaded in the player. Searching for a desired disc: “CD” appears on the display. The discs set in the player are played continuously, starting with the last disc you inserted. The disc number of the disc currently being played, the track number and the time from the beginning of the program appear on the display. Push the “ ” or “ ” button to select the disc number. Push the button several times until the desired disc number appears on the display. When you release the button, the player will start playing the selected disc from the first track. When play of one disc ends, the first track of the following disc starts. When play of the final disc ends, play of the first disc starts again. The player will skip any empty disc trays. 211 AUDIO (d) Searching for a desired track or disc (e) Selecting a desired track Searching for a desired track: “TRACK” button: Use for direct access to a desired track. Push the “SCAN” button briefly. “SCAN” will appear on the display. The compact disc player will play the next track for 10 seconds, then scan again. To select a track, push the “SCAN” button a second time. If the player reaches the end of the disc, it will continue scanning at track 1. Push either side of the “TRACK” button several times until the desired track number appears on the display. As you release the button, the player will start playing the selected track from the beginning. After all the tracks are scanned in one pass, normal play resumes. Searching for a desired disc: Push the “SCAN” button until you hear a beep. With “D.SCAN” on the display, the program at the beginning of each disc will be played for 10 seconds. To continue listening to the program of your choice, push the button a second time. After all the discs in the automatic changer are scanned in one pass, the scan function is cancelled. 212 “Fast forward” button: Push the “""” button and hold it to fast forward the disc. When you release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing from that position. “Reverse” button: Push the “AA” button and hold it to reverse the disc. When you release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing. AUDIO (f) Repeating a track or a disc (g) Random playing “RPT” button: There are 2 repeat features — you can either replay a disc track or a whole compact disc. “RAND” button: There are 2 random features — you can either listen to the tracks on all the compact discs in the player in random order, or only listen to the tracks on a specific compact disc in random order. Repeating a track: Push the “RPT” button briefly while the track is playing. “RPT” will appear on the display. When the track ends, it will automatically be replayed. This process will be continued until you push the button again to turn off the repeat feature. Repeating a disc: Push the “RPT” button and hold it until you hear a beep. “D.RPT” will appear on the display. The player will repeat all the tracks on the disc you are listening to. When the disc ends, the player will automatically go back to the top track of the disc and replay. This process will be continued until you push the button again to turn off the repeat feature. Random playing for the tracks on a disc: Push the “RAND” button briefly. “RAND” will appear on the display and play the disc you are listening to in random order. Random playing for all the tracks in the automatic changer: Push the “RAND” button and hold it until you hear a beep. “D.RAND” will appear on the display and the player will perform all the tracks on all the discs in the automatic changer in random order. To turn off the random feature, push “RAND” a second time. When a track is skipped or the system is inoperative, push the button to reset. 213 AUDIO (h) If the player malfunctions Car audio system operating hints If the player or another unit equipped with the player malfunctions, your audio system will display one of the four following error messages. If “WAIT” appears on the display: It indicates that the inside of the player unit may be too hot due to the very high ambient temperature. Remove the disc from the player and allow the player to cool down. If “ERROR 1” appears on the display: It indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged, or it was inserted up−side down. Clean the disc or insert it correctly. If “ERROR 3” or “ERROR 4” appears on the display: It indicates there is a trouble inside the system. Eject the disc. If the malfunction is not rectified: Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer. NOTICE To ensure correct audio system operations: D Be careful not to spill beverages over the audio system. D Do not put anything other than a cassette tape or compact disc into the cassette tape slot or compact disc slot. D The use of a cellular phone inside or near the vehicle may cause a noise from the speakers of the audio system which you are listening to. However, this does not indicate a malfunction. Radio reception Usually, a problem with radio reception does not mean there is a problem with your radio − it is just the normal result of conditions outside the vehicle. For example, nearby buildings and terrain can interfere with FM reception. Power lines or telephone wires can interfere with AM signals. And of course, radio signals have a limited range. The farther you are from a station, the weaker its signal will be. In addition, reception conditions change constantly as your vehicle moves. Here are some common reception problems that probably do not indicate a problem with your radio: 214 AUDIO FM AM Fading and drifting stations − Generally, the effective range of FM is about 40 km (25 miles). Once outside this range, you may notice fading and drifting, which increase with the distance from the radio transmitter. They are often accompanied by distortion. Fading − AM broadcasts are reflected by the upper atmosphere − especially at night. These reflected signals can interfere with those received directly from the radio station, causing the radio station to sound alternately strong and weak. Multi−path − FM signals are reflective, making it possible for two signals to reach your antenna at the same time. If this happens, the signals will cancel each other out, causing a momentary flutter or loss of reception. Static and fluttering − These occur when signals are blocked by buildings, trees, or other large objects. Increasing the bass level may reduce static and fluttering. Station swapping − If the FM signal you are listening to is interrupted or weakened, and there is another strong station nearby on the FM band, your radio may tune in the second station until the original signal can be picked up again. Station interference − When a reflected signal and a signal received directly from a radio station are very nearly the same frequency, they can interfere with each other, making it difficult to hear the broadcast. Static − AM is easily affected by external sources of electrical noise, such as high tension power lines, lightening, or electrical motors. This results in static. Caring for your cassette player and tapes For the best performance for your cassette player and tapes: Clean the tape head and other parts regularly. D A dirty tape head or tape path can decrease sound quality and tangle your cassette tapes. The easiest way to clean them is by using a cleaning tape. (A wet type is recommended.) 215 AUDIO Use high−quality cassettes: Caring for your compact disc player and discs D Low−quality cassette tapes can cause many problems, including poor sound, inconsistent playing speed, and constant auto−reversing. They can also get stuck or tangled in the cassette player. D Your compact disc player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only. D Do not use a cassette if it has been damaged or tangled or if its label is peeling off. D Do not leave a cassette in the player if you are not listening to it, especially if it is hot outside. D Store cassettes in their cases and out of direct sunlight. D Avoid using cassettes with a total playing time longer than 100 minutes (50 minutes per side). The tape used in these cassettes is thin and could get stuck or tangled in the cassette player. D Extremely high temperature can keep your compact disc player from working. On hot days, use air conditioning to cool the vehicle interior before you listen to a disc. D Bumpy roads or other vibrations may make your compact disc player skip. D If moisture gets into your compact disc player, you may not hear any sound even though your compact disc player appears to be working. Eject all discs from the player and wait until the player dries. CAUTION Compact disc players use an invisible laser beam which could cause hazardous radiation exposure if directed outside the unit. Be sure to operate the player correctly. 216 AUDIO D Use only compact discs marked as shown above. The following products may not be playable on your compact disc player. "Special shaped discs Copy−protected CD CD−R (CD−Recordable) CD−RW (CD−Re−writable) CD−ROM "Low quality discs 217 AUDIO "Labeled discs "Correct NOTICE To prevent damage to the player or changer, do not use special shaped, low quality or labeled discs such as those shown in the illustrations. 218 "Wrong D Handle compact discs carefully, especially when you set them into the player. Hold them on the edge and do not bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints on them, particularly on the shiny side. D Dirt, scrapes, warping, pin holes, or other disc damage could cause the player to skip or to repeat a section of a track. (To see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the light.) AUDIO To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint−free cloth that has been dampened with water. Wipe in a straight line from the center to the edge of the disc (not in a circle). Do not use a conventional record cleaner or anti−static device. 219 AUDIO 220 SECTION 3–1 STARTING AND DRIVING Starting and driving Three−way catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine exhaust caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition switch with steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to start the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic modulated suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle skid control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake pad wear limit indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 223 224 225 226 226 227 234 237 237 240 242 246 246 221 STARTING AND DRIVING THREE−WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER NOTICE A large amount of unburned gases flowing into the three−way catalytic converter may cause it to overheat and create a fire hazard. To prevent this and other damage, observe the following precautions: D Use only unleaded gasoline. D Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level; running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, creating an excessive load on the three−way catalytic converter. D Do not allow the engine to run at idle speed for more than 20 minutes. The three−way catalytic converters are emission control devices installed in the exhaust system. D Avoid racing the engine. It looks somewhat like a muffler, but its purpose is to reduce pollutants in the exhaust gas. D Do not turn off the ignition while the vehicle is moving. CAUTION D Keep people and combustible materials away from the exhaust pipe while the engine is running. The exhaust gas is very hot. D Do not drive, idle or park your vehicle over anything that might burn easily such as grass, leaves, paper or rags. 222 D Do not push−start or pull−start your vehicle. D Keep your engine in good running order. Malfunctions in the engine electrical system, electronic ignition system/distributor ignition system or fuel system could cause an extremely high three−way catalytic converter temperature. D If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, take your vehicle in for a check−up as soon as possible. Remember, your Lexus dealer knows your vehicle and its three−way catalytic converter system best. STARTING AND DRIVING D To ensure that the three−way catalytic converter and the entire emission control system operate properly, your vehicle must receive the periodic inspections required by the Lexus Maintenance Schedule. For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”. ENGINE EXHAUST CAUTION CAUTION D Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust. It contains carbon monoxide, which is a colorless and odorless gas. It can cause unconsciousness or even death. D Make sure the exhaust system has no holes or loose connections. The system should be checked from time to time. If you hit something, or notice a change in the sound of the exhaust, have the system checked immediately. D Do not run the engine in a garage or enclosed area except for the time needed to drive the vehicle in or out. The exhaust gases cannot escape, making this a particularly dangerous situation. D Do not remain for a long time in a parked vehicle with the engine running. If it is unavoidable, however, do so only in an unconfined area and adjust the heating or cooling system to force outside air into the vehicle. D Keep the trunk lid closed while driving. An open or unsealed trunk lid may cause exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. 223 STARTING AND DRIVING D To allow proper operation of your vehicle’s ventilation system, keep the inlet grilles in front of the windshield clear of snow, leaves, or other obstructions. D If you smell exhaust fumes in the vehicle, drive with the windows open and the trunk lid closed. Have the cause immediately located and corrected. BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE 1. Check the area around the vehicle before entering it. 2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle, seat cushion angle, seat cushion height, head restraint height and steering wheel angle. 3. Vehicles with power adjustable pedals—Adjust the position of the accelerator and brake pedals. 4. Adjust the inside and outside rear view mirrors. 5. Lock all doors. 6. Fasten seat belts. Remember to check that the service reminder indicators function when turning the key to “ON”, and check the fuel gauge to see that you have sufficient fuel. 224 STARTING AND DRIVING IGNITION SWITCH WITH STEERING LOCK “START” − Starter motor on. The key will return to the “ON” position when released. For starting tips, see page 226. “ON” − Engine on and all accessories on. This is the normal driving position. NOTICE Do not leave the key in the “ON” position if the engine is not running. The battery will discharge and the electronic ignition system could be damaged. “ACC” − Accessories such as the radio operate, but the engine is off. If you leave the key in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position and open the driver’s door, a buzzer will remind you to remove the key. “LOCK” − Engine is off and the steering wheel is locked. The ignition key can be removed only at this position. To turn the ignition switch from “ACC” to the “LOCK” position, you must put the transmission selector lever in the “P” position. Once you remove the key, the engine immobiliser system is automatically set. See “Engine immobiliser system” on page 14. When starting the engine, the key may seem stuck at the “LOCK” position. To free it, first be sure the key is pushed all the way in, and then rock the steering wheel slightly while turning the key gently. If, in an emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the key only to “ACC”. 225 STARTING AND DRIVING PARKING BRAKE HOW TO START THE ENGINE Before cranking 1. Apply the parking brake firmly. 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories. 3. Put the selector lever in “P”. If you need to restart the engine while the vehicle is moving, put the selector lever in “N”. A starter safety device will prevent the starter from operating if the selector lever is in any drive position. 4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it to the floor until driving off. To set: Hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot. Push down the parking brake pedal with your left foot. To release: Hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot and push the parking brake pedal with your left foot. When you lift your left foot, the parking brake pedal will follow it to the released position. Before leaving your vehicle, firmly apply the parking brake. 226 Starting the engine Before starting the engine, be sure to follow the instructions in “Before cranking”. Normal starting procedure The multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system in your engine automatically controls the proper air−fuel mixture for starting. You can start a cold or hot engine as follows: CAUTION 1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, crank the engine by turning the key to “START”. Release it when the engine starts. Before driving, make sure the parking brake is fully released and that the parking brake reminder light is off. 2. After the engine runs for about 10 seconds, you are ready to drive. STARTING AND DRIVING If the weather is below freezing, let the engine warm up for a few minutes before driving. Do not leave the vehicle while the engine is warming up. If the engine stalls ... Simply restart it, using the correct procedure given in normal starting. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Your automatic transmission has a shift lock system to minimize the possibility of incorrect operation. This means you can only shift out of “P” position when the brake pedal is depressed with the ignition switch in “ON” position. (K) If the engine will not start ... See “If your vehicle will not start” on page 264. NOTICE D Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat the starter and wiring systems. D Do not race a cold engine. D If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine checked immediately. 31E158 227 STARTING AND DRIVING "The shift position is displayed on the instrument cluster. P: Parking, engine starting and key removal position R: Reverse position N: Neutral position D: Normal driving position (shifting into overdrive possible) 4: Position for engine braking (shifting into overdrive not possible) When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift from “D” to “4”, engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. For the operation to decrease the vehicle speed, see page 236. 3, 2: Position for more powerful engine braking L: Position for maximum engine braking 228 Correct use of the automatic transmission is explained in the following parts. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) Normal driving Using engine braking Using the “3”, “2” and “L” positions Backing up Parking Good driving practice If you cannot shift the selector lever STARTING AND DRIVING (a) Normal driving " 1 Brake pedal " 1 “P” (Park) position 2 “N” (Neutral) position 1. Start the engine as instructed in “How to start the engine” on page 226. The transmission must be in “P” or “N”. The engine will not start in any drive position even if the ignition key is turned to “START”. 2 “D” (Drive) position 2. With your foot holding down the brake pedal, shift the selector lever to “D”. Always use the “D” position to improve fuel economy and quiet driving. Only in this position, shifting into the overdrive gear is possible. However, while the engine coolant temperature is low, the transmission will not shift into the overdrive gear even in the “D” position. (See “(b) Using engine braking” and “(f) Good driving practice” for exceptions.) CAUTION Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while shifting. 229 STARTING AND DRIVING 3. Release the parking brake and brake pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal slowly for smooth starting. (b) Using engine braking In normal cruising, the vehicle will start in first gear and automatically shift up to the most suitable gear. On inclines, declines or winding roads, etc., the vehicle shifts up and down automatically according to the running conditions to obtain the suitable driving power and engine braking. When the lever is in the “4” position, the automatic transmission system will select the most suitable gear for the running conditions such as hill climbing, hard towing, etc. If you need to accelerate rapidly while driving, depress the accelerator pedal to the full throttle position. This provides more acceleration by automatically downshifting the transmission to the next lower gear or beyond, depending on the vehicle speed. If engine braking is needed, such as in descending a long hill, see “(b) Using engine braking”. To use the braking power of the engine, downshift the transmission in the way described below: 1 Shift into the “4” position. The transmission will downshift to fourth gear and engine braking will be enabled. When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift from “D” to “4”, engine braking will not be applied because the cruise control is not cancelled. If you need to decrease the vehicle speed, see page 236. 2 230 Shift into the “3” position. The transmission will downshift to third gear when the vehicle speed is or becomes lower than 147 km/h (91 mph) and more powerful engine braking will be enabled. STARTING AND DRIVING 3 4 Shift into the “2” position. The transmission will downshift to second gear when the vehicle speed is or becomes lower than 95 km/h (59 mph) and more powerful engine braking than that of “3” position will be enabled. (c) Using the “3”, “2” and “L” positions Shift into the “L” position. The transmission will downshift to first gear when the vehicle speed is or becomes lower than 41 km/h (25 mph) and maximum engine braking will be enabled. With the selector lever in “3”, “2” or “L”, you can start the vehicle in motion as with the lever in “D”. The “3”, “2” and “L” positions are used for strong engine braking as described previously. With the selector lever in “3” or “2”, the vehicle will start in first gear and automatically shift to second gear or third gear. CAUTION With the selector lever in “L”, the transmission is engaged in first gear. Be careful when downshifting on a slippery surface. The abrupt change in engine speed could cause the vehicle to spin or skid. NOTICE D Be careful not to over−rev the engine. Watch the tachometer to keep engine rpm from going into the red zone. The approximate maximum allowable speed for each position is given above for your reference. “3” . . . 147 km/h (91 mph) “2” . . . 94 km/h (58 mph) “L” . . . 52 km/h (32 mph) D Do not continue hill climbing or hard towing for a long time in the “3”, “2” or “L” position. This may cause severe automatic transmission damage from overheating. To prevent such damage, “4” position should be used in hill climbing or hard towing. 231 STARTING AND DRIVING (e) Parking (d) Backing up " 1 Brake pedal 2 “R” (Reverse) position 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. 2. With the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the selector lever to the “R” position. NOTICE " 1 Brake pedal 2 Parking brake pedal 3 “P” (Park) position 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. 2. Depress the parking brake fully to securely apply the parking brake. 3. With the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the selector lever to the “P” position. Never shift into reverse while the vehicle is moving. CAUTION Never attempt to move the selector lever into “P” under any circumstances while the vehicle is moving. Serious mechanical damage and loss of vehicle control may result. 232 STARTING AND DRIVING (f) Good driving practice (g) If you cannot shift the selector lever D If the transmission repeatedly shifts up and down between fourth and overdrive gears when climbing a gentle slope, shift the selector lever to the “4” position. Be sure to shift the selector lever to the “D” position after climbing the slope. If you cannot shift the selector lever even though the brake pedal is depressed, use the shift lock override button. For instructions, see “If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever” on page 284. D When towing a trailer, in order to maintain efficient engine braking and electrical charging performance, do not use overdrive. CAUTION Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping. NOTICE Always use the brake pedal or the parking brake to hold the vehicle on an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold the vehicle using the accelerator pedal, as this can cause the transmission to overheat. 233 STARTING AND DRIVING CRUISE CONTROL Turning on the system The cruise control allows you to cruise the vehicle at a desired speed over 40 km/h (25 mph) with your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your cruising speed can be maintained although a slight speed change may occur when driving up or down a gradient, within the limits of engine performance. On steeper hills, a great speed change will occur so it is better to drive without the cruise control. CAUTION D To help maintain maximum control of your vehicle, do not use the cruise control when driving in heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or snow−covered) or winding roads. To operate the cruise control, push the main switch. This turns the system on. The indicator light in the instrument cluster shows that you can now set your desired cruising speed. Another push on the switch will turn the system completely off. D Avoid vehicle speed increases when driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is too fast in relation to the cruise control set speed, cancel the cruise control then downshift the transmission to use engine braking to slow down. When the ignition key is turned off, the main switch is also automatically turned off. To use the cruise control again, push the main switch again to turn it on. CAUTION To avoid accidental cruise control engagement, keep the main switch off when not using the cruise control. 234 STARTING AND DRIVING Setting operation 2 Cancelling the preset speed You can cancel the preset speed by either of the following: a. Pulling the control lever in the “CANCEL” direction. b. Depressing the brake pedal. If the vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will be automatically cancelled. If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10 mph) below the preset speed, the preset speed will also automatically be cancelled. If the preset speed automatically cancels out for other than these reasons, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer at the earliest opportunity. "Each function is described below. 1 Setting at a desired speed The transmission must be in “D” before you set the cruise control speed. Bring the vehicle to the desired speed, press the control lever downward in the “SET/COAST” direction and release it. This sets the vehicle at that speed. Now you may take your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you need acceleration − for example, when passing − depress the accelerator pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed the set speed. When you release the accelerator pedal, the vehicle will return to the speed set prior to the acceleration. 3 Resetting to a faster speed Press the control lever upward in the “RES/ACC” direction and hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed is attained. While the lever is held upward, the vehicle will gradually gain speed. When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can be increased 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by pressing the control lever upward in the “RES/ACC” direction quickly. However, a quicker way to reset is to accelerate the vehicle and then press the control lever downward in the “SET/COAST” direction. 235 STARTING AND DRIVING 4 Resetting to a slower speed Press the control lever downward in the “SET/COAST” direction and hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed is attained. While the lever is held downward, the vehicle speed will gradually decrease. When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can be lowered 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by pressing the control lever downward in the “SET/COAST” direction quickly. However, a quicker way to reset is to depress the brake pedal and then press the control lever downward in the “SET/COAST” direction. Even if you downshift the transmission from the “D” position to “4” with the cruise control on, engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. To decrease the vehicle speed, reset to a slower speed with the cruise control lever or depress the brake pedal. If you use the brake pedal, cruise control is cancelled. 5 Resuming the preset speed If the preset speed is cancelled by pulling the control lever or by depressing the brake pedal, pushing the lever up in the “RES/ACC” direction will restore the speed set prior to cancellation. However, once the vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will not be resumed. 236 Cruise control failure warning If the “CRUISE” indicator light in the instrument cluster flashes when using the cruise control, push the main switch to turn the system off and then push it again to turn it on. If any of the following conditions then occurs, there is some trouble in the cruise control system. Contact your Lexus dealer and have your Lexus inspected. D The indicator light does not come on. D The indicator light flashes again. D The indicator light goes out after it comes on. STARTING AND DRIVING ELECTRONIC MODULATED SUSPENSION This electronic modulated suspension adjusts the damping effect on the shock absorbers with the control switch. Select one of the 4 modes which is suited to the driving conditions with the control switch to provide good riding comfort and stability. TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM The traction control system automatically helps prevent the spinning of front wheels when the vehicle is started or accelerated on slippery road surfaces. When the ignition key is turned to “ON”, the system automatically turns on. CAUTION Under certain slippery road conditions, full traction of the vehicle and power against front wheels cannot be maintained, even though the traction control system is in operation. Do not drive the vehicle under any speed or maneuvering conditions which may cause the vehicle to lose traction control. In situations where the road surface is covered with ice or snow, your vehicle should be fitted with snow tires or tire chains. Always drive at an appropriate and cautious speed for the present road conditions. 1 2 3 4 5 6 For sporty type driving such as on winding mountain roads and high speed driving For moderate high speed driving For ordinary driving such as in the city traffic For driving on a bumpy road Soft Firm 237 STARTING AND DRIVING Normal driving mode The slip indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition key is turned to “ON”. If the indicator light does not come on when the ignition is turned on, contact your Lexus dealer. Traction control off mode "Slip indicator light Leave the system on during the ordinary driving so that it can operate when needed. You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle is started. This means that the traction control system is in the self−check mode, but does not indicate a malfunction. When the traction control system is operating, the following conditions occur: D The system controls the spinning of the front wheels. At this time, the slip indicator light blinks. D You may feel vibration or noise in your vehicle, caused by operation of the brakes. This indicates the system is functioning properly. 238 If your wheels get stuck in a ditch when you are driving on a severe off road and sand, turn off the traction control system. This system that controls engine performance interferes with the process of freeing your wheels. To turn off: Push “TRAC OFF” switch. The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will come on. The vehicle skid control system is always activated, even if the traction control system is turned off. To turn on: Push “TRAC OFF” switch once again. The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will go off. STARTING AND DRIVING “TRAC OFF” indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition key is turned to “ON”. It will come on again when you push the “TRAC OFF” switch to turn off the system. If the light comes on while driving, the system does not work. However, as conventional braking operates when applied, there is no problem to continue your driving. In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer: In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer: D The indicator light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to “ON”. D The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is turned to “ON”. D The indicator light remains on after the ignition is turned on. D The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned to “ON”. D The indicator light comes on with the normal driving mode while driving. “VSC” warning light D The warning light comes on while driving. The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will come on when the “VSC” warning light comes on even if the “TRAC OFF” switch is not pushed. This light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the traction control system or the vehicle skid control system. The light will come on when the ignition key is turned to “ON” and will go off after a few seconds. 239 STARTING AND DRIVING VEHICLE SKID CONTROL SYSTEM The vehicle skid control system helps provide integrated control of the systems such as anti−lock brake system, traction control, engine control, etc. This system automatically controls the brakes and engine to help prevent the vehicle from skidding when cornering on a slippery road surface or operating steering wheel abruptly. The system will activate when your vehicle speed reaches or exceeds 15 km/h (9 mph), and will deactivate when the vehicle speed reduced to below 15 km/h (9 mph). D Only use tires of specified size. The size, manufacture, brand and tread pattern for all 4 tires should be the same. If you use the tires other than specified, or different type or size, the vehicle skid control system may not function correctly. When replacing the tires or wheels, contact your Lexus dealer. D In situations where the road surface is covered with ice or snow, your vehicle should be fitted with snow tires or tire chains. You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle is started. This means that the system is in the self−check mode but does not indicate a malfunction. CAUTION D Do not rely excessively on the vehicle skid control system. Even if the vehicle skid control system is operating, you must always drive carefully and attentively to avoid serious injury. Reckless driving will result in an unexpected accident. If the slip indicator light blinks, sounding an alarm, special care should be taken while driving. "Slip indicator light If the vehicle is going to skid during driving, the slip indicator light blinks and an alarm sounds intermittently. Special care should be taken while driving. The slip indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition key is turned to “ON”. If the indicator light does not come on when the ignition is turned on, contact your Lexus dealer. 240 STARTING AND DRIVING “VSC” warning light The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will come on when the “VSC” warning light comes on even if the “TRAC OFF” switch is not pushed. This light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the vehicle skid control system or the traction control system. The light will come on when the ignition key is turned to “ON” and will go off after a few seconds. If the light comes on while driving, the system does not work. However, as conventional braking operates when applied, there is no problem to continue your driving. In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer: D The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is turned to “ON”. D The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned to “ON”. D The warning light comes on while driving. 241 STARTING AND DRIVING BRAKE SYSTEM The tandem master cylinder brake system is a hydraulic system with two separate sub−systems. If either sub−system should fail, the other will still work. However, the pedal will be harder to press, and your stopping distance will be longer. Also, the brake system warning light may come on. CAUTION Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed immediately. Brake booster The brake booster uses engine vacuum to power−assist the brakes. If the engine should quit while you are driving, you can bring the vehicle to a stop with normal pedal pressure. There is enough reserved vacuum for one or two stops but no more! CAUTION D Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls. Each push on the pedal uses up your reserved vacuum. D Even if the power assist is completely lost, the brakes will still work. But you will have to push the pedal hard, much harder than normal. And your braking distance will be longer. 242 Anti−lock brake system The anti−lock brake system is designed to help prevent lock−up of the wheels during a sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. This assists in providing directional stability and steering performance of the vehicle under these circumstances. Effective way to press the ABS brake pedal: When the anti−lock brake system function is in action, you may feel the brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise. In this situation, to let the anti−lock brake system work for you, just hold the brake pedal down more firmly. Do not pump the brake in a panic stop. This will result in reduced braking performance. The anti−lock brake system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately 10 km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle decelerates to a speed below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph). Depressing the brake pedal on slippery road surfaces such as on the manhole cover, the steel plate under the construction, joints in the bridge, etc. on a rainy day tends to activate the anti−lock brake system. STARTING AND DRIVING You may hear a click or motor sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle is started. This means that the anti−lock brake system is in the self−check mode, and does not indicate a malfunction. When the anti−lock brake system is activated, the following conditions may occur. They do not indicate a malfunction of the system: D You may hear the anti−lock brake system operating and feel the brake pedal pulsating and the vibrations of the vehicle body and steering wheel. You may also hear the motor sound in the engine compartment even after the vehicle is stopped. D At the end of the anti−lock brake system activation, the brake pedal may move a little forward. CAUTION Do not overestimate the anti−lock brake system: Although the anti−lock brake system assists in providing vehicle control, it is still important to drive with all due care and maintain a moderate speed and safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, because there are limits to the vehicle stability and effectiveness of steering wheel operation even with the anti−lock brake system on. If tires grip performance exceeds its capability, or if hydroplaning occurs during high speed driving in the rain, the anti−lock brake system does not provide vehicle control. Anti−lock brake system is not designed to shorten the stopping distance: Always drive at the moderate speed and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Compared with vehicles without an anti−lock brake system, your vehicle may require a longer stopping distance in the following cases: D Driving on rough, gravel or snow−covered roads. D Driving with tire chains installed. D Driving over the steps such as the joints on the road. D Driving on roads where the road surface is pitted or has other differences in surface height. Install all 4 tires of specified size at appropriate pressure: The anti−lock brake system detects vehicle speeds using the speed sensors for respective wheels’ turning speeds. The use of tires other than specified may fail to detect the accurate turning speed resulting in a longer stopping distance. 243 STARTING AND DRIVING “ABS” warning light If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the parts monitored by the warning light. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle. D The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, or remains on. D The light comes on while you are driving. A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not indicate a problem. CAUTION " 1 U.S.A. 2 Canada Vehicles without vehicle skid control system— The light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−lock brake system works properly, the light turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter, if either of the systems malfunctions, the light comes on again. When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the anti−lock brake system does not operate, but the brake system still operates conventionally. When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the anti−lock brake system does not operate so that the wheels could lock up during a sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. 244 If the “ABS” warning light remains on together with the brake system warning light, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. In this case, not only the anti−lock brake system will fail but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking. Vehicles with vehicle skid control system— The light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−lock brake system and the brake assist system work properly, the light turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter, if either of the systems malfunctions, the light comes on again. STARTING AND DRIVING When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the anti−lock brake system, the brake assist system, the traction control system and the vehicle skid control system do not operate, but the brake system still operates conventionally. When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the anti−lock brake system does not operate so that the wheels could lock up during a sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the parts monitored by the warning light. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle. D The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, or remains on. D The light comes on while you are driving. A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not indicate a problem. CAUTION If the “ABS” warning light remains on together with the brake system warning light, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. Drum−in−disc type parking brake system Your vehicle has a drum−in−disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding−down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drums are replaced. Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding−down. Brake assist system (vehicles with vehicle skid control system) When you slam the brakes on, the brake assist system judges as an emergency stop and provides more powerful braking for a driver who cannot hold down the brake pedal firmly. When you slam the brakes on, more powerful braking will be applied. At this time, you may hear a sound in the engine compartment and feel the vibrations of the brake pedal. This does not indicate a malfunction. The brake assist system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately 10 km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle decelerates to a speed below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph). For an explanation of this system’s warning light, see “ABS warning light” on page 55. In this case, not only the anti−lock brake system will fail but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking. 245 STARTING AND DRIVING BRAKE PAD WEAR LIMIT INDICATORS TYPES OF TIRES Determine what kind of tires your vehicle is originally equipped with. 1. Summer tires Summer tires are high−speed capability tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow−covered or icy roads. For driving on snow−covered or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires. The brake pad wear limit indicators on your disc brakes give a warning noise when the brake pads are worn to the extent that replacement is required. If you hear a squealing or scraping noise while driving, have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Expensive rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed. 246 2. All season tires All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use all year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving. STARTING AND DRIVING CAUTION D Do not use tires other than the manufacturer’s designated tires, and never mix tires or wheels of the sizes different from the originals. D Do not mix summer and all season tires on your vehicle as this can cause dangerous handling characteristics, resulting in loss of control. 247 STARTING AND DRIVING 248 SECTION 3–2 STARTING AND DRIVING Driving tips Break−in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tips for driving in various conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dinghy towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 250 251 252 254 254 260 249 DRIVING TIPS BREAK−IN PERIOD Drive gently and avoid high speeds. You need not follow a break−in schedule with your new Lexus. But following a few simple tips for the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can add to the future economy and long life of your vehicle: D Avoid full throttle acceleration when starting and driving. D Avoid racing the engine. D Try to avoid hard stops during the first 300 km (200 miles). D Do not drive for a long time at any single speed, either fast or slow. D Do not tow a trailer during the first 800 km (500 miles). 250 OPERATION IN FOREIGN COUNTRIES If you plan to drive your Lexus in another country ... First, comply with the vehicle registration laws. Second, confirm the availability of the correct fuel (unleaded and minimum octane rating). DRIVING TIPS TIPS FOR DRIVING IN VARIOUS CONDITIONS D Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. This will allow you much better control. D Drive slowly onto curbs and, if possible, at a right angle. Avoid driving onto high, sharp−edged objects and other road hazards. Failure to do so can lead to severe tire damage resulting in tire bursts. Drive slowly when passing over bumps or travelling on a bumpy road. Otherwise, the impact could cause severe damage to the tires and/or wheels. D When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels until they touch the curb so that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the parking brake, and place the transmission in “P”. If necessary, block the wheels. D Washing your vehicle or driving through deep water may get the brakes wet. To see whether they are wet, check that there is no traffic near you and then press the pedal lightly. If you do not feel a normal braking force, the brakes are probably wet. To dry them, drive the vehicle cautiously while lightly pressing the brake pedal with the parking brake applied. If they still do not work safely, pull to the side of the road and call a Lexus dealer for assistance. CAUTION D Before driving off, make sure the parking brake is fully released and that the parking brake reminder light is off. D Do not leave your vehicle unattended while the engine is running. D Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. It can cause dangerous overheating, needless wear, and poor fuel economy. D To drive down a long or steep hill, reduce your speed and downshift. Remember, if you ride the brakes excessively, they may overheat and not work properly. See page 230. D Be careful when accelerating, upshifting, downshifting or braking on a slippery surface. The abrupt change in engine speed, such as sudden acceleration or engine braking, could cause the vehicle to spin or skid. D Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 140 km/h (85 mph) unless your vehicle has high−speed capability tires. Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high−speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds. 251 DRIVING TIPS D Do not continue normal driving when the brakes are wet. If they are wet, your vehicle will require a longer stopping distance, and it may pull to one side when the brakes are applied. Also, the parking brake will not hold the vehicle securely. WINTER DRIVING TIPS Make sure you have a proper freeze protection of engine coolant. Your coolant must contain ethylene−glycol type coolant for a proper corrosion protection of aluminum components. Use “Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” or equivalent. See “Checking the engine coolant level” on page 315 for instructions. NOTICE Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or plain water alone. When it is extremely cold, we recommend to use 60% solution for your Lexus, to provide protection down to about −50_C (−58_F). Do not use more than 70% solution for better coolant performance. Check the condition of the battery and cables. Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of any battery, so it must be in top shape to provide enough power for winter starting. Page 341 tells you how to visually inspect the battery. Your Lexus dealer and most service stations will be pleased to check the battery charge level. 252 DRIVING TIPS Make sure the engine oil viscosity is suitable for the cold weather. See page 314 for recommended viscosity. Leaving a heavy summer oil in your vehicle during winter months may cause harder starting. If you are not sure about which oil to use, call your Lexus dealer − they will be pleased to help. Check the electronic ignition system for loose connections or obvious damage. Keep the door locks from freezing. Keep ice and snow from accumulating under the fenders. Ice and snow built up under your fenders can make steering difficult. During bad winter driving, stop and check under the fenders occasionally. Depending on where you are driving, we recommend you carry some emergency equipment. Some of the things you might put in the vehicle are tire chains, window scraper, bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel, jumper cables, etc. Squirt lock de−icer or glycerine into the locks to keep them from freezing. Use a washer fluid containing an antifreeze solution. This product is available at your Lexus dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow the manufacturer’s directions for how much to mix with water. NOTICE Do not use engine antifreeze or any other substitute because it may damage your vehicle’s paint. Do not use your parking brake when there is a possibility it could freeze. When parking, put the transmission into “P” and block the rear wheels. Do not use the parking brake, or snow or water accumulated in and around the parking brake mechanism may freeze the parking brake, making it hard to release. 253 DRIVING TIPS DINGHY TOWING TRAILER TOWING Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger−carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer will have an adverse effect on handling, performance, braking, durability and driving economy (fuel consumption etc.). Your safety and satisfaction depend on the proper use of correct equipment and cautious driving habits. For your safety and the safety of others, you must not overload your vehicle or trailer. Lexus warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by towing a trailer for commercial purposes. Ask your local Lexus dealer for further details before towing. Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with four wheels on the ground) behind a motorhome. We recommend you to use a weight carrying hitch when towing a trailer. NOTICE NOTICE Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to your vehicle. 254 When towing a trailer, be sure to consult your Lexus dealer for further information on additional requirements such as a towing kit etc. DRIVING TIPS Weight limits Before towing, make sure the total trailer weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and trailer tongue load are all within the limits. The total trailer weight and tongue load can be measured with platform scales found at a highway weighing station, building supply company, trucking company, junk yard, etc. D Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by the hitch manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be physically capable of towing a higher weight, the operator must determine the maximum weight rating of the particular hitch assembly and never exceed the maximum weight rating specified for the trailer hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight rating set by the trailer hitch manufacturer can cause an accident resulting in serious personal injuries. D The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) indicated on the Certification Label. The gross vehicle weight is the sum weight of the unloaded vehicle, driver, passengers, luggage, hitch and trailer tongue load. It also includes the weight of any special equipment installed on your vehicle. D The load on either the front or rear axle resulting from distribution of the gross vehicle weight on both axles must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) listed on the Certification Label. "Certification label CAUTION D The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo load) must not exceed 907 kg (2000 lb.). Exceeding this weight is dangerous. 255 DRIVING TIPS Hitches D If you wish to install a trailer hitch, your Lexus dealer should be consulted. 32L002 D Use only a hitch which is recommended by Lexus dealer and conforms to the total trailer weight requirement. D Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer. Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coat of grease. "Total trailer weight "Tongue load D The trailer cargo load should be distributed so that the tongue load is 9 to 11% of the total trailer weight, not exceeding the maximum of 90 kg (200 lb.). Tongue load x 100 = 9 to 11% Total trailer weight D Never load the trailer with more weight in the back than in the front. About 60% of the trailer load should be in the front half of the trailer and the remaining 40% in the rear. 256 D Lexus recommends removing the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer to reduce the possibility of additional damage caused by the hitch if your vehicle is struck from behind. After removing the hitch, seal any mounting holes in the vehicle body to prevent entry of pollutants such as exhaust fumes, dirt, water, etc. NOTICE D Install the trailer hitch using only the position recommended by your Lexus dealer. Do not install the trailer hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage. D Do not use axle−mounted hitches as they can cause damage to the axle housing, wheel bearings, wheels or tires. DRIVING TIPS Brakes and safety chains Tires D Lexus recommends trailers with brakes that conform to any applicable federal and state/provincial regulations. D Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are properly inflated. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated below: D A safety chain must always be used between the towing vehicle and the trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the chain for turns. The chain should cross under the trailer tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping to the ground in case it becomes damaged or separated. For correct safety chain procedures, follow the hitch or trailer manufacturer’s recommendations. CAUTION D If the total trailer weight exceeds 500 kg (1102 lb.), trailer brakes are required. D Never tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic system as it will lower its braking effectiveness. D Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both the trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball, there is possible danger of the trailer wandering over into another lane. Tire pressure, kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi) Front 200 (2.0, 29) Rear 200 (2.0, 29) D The trailer tires should be inflated to the pressure recommended by the trailer manufacturer in respect to the total trailer weight. Trailer lights D Trailer lights must comply with federal, state/provincial and local regulations. See your local recreational vehicle dealer or rental agency for the correct type of wiring and relays for your trailer. Check for correct operation of the turn signals and stop lights each time you hitch up. Direct splicing may damage your vehicle’s electrical system and cause a malfunction of your lights. Break−in schedule D Lexus recommends that you do not tow a trailer with a new vehicle or a vehicle with any new power train component (engine, transmission, differential, wheel bearing, etc.) for the first 800 km (500 miles) of driving. 257 DRIVING TIPS Maintenance Trailer towing tips D If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due to the additional load. For this information, please refer to the scheduled maintenance information in the “Owner ’s Manual Supplement/ Scheduled Maintenance”. When towing a trailer, your vehicle will handle differently than when not towing. The three main causes of vehicle−trailer accidents are driver error, excessive speed and improper trailer loading. Keep these in mind when towing: D Retighten all fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately 1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving. D Before starting out, check the operation of the lights and all vehicle−trailer connections. After driving a short distance, stop and recheck the lights and connections. Practice turning, stopping and backing with a trailer in an area away from traffic until you learn the feel. Pre−towing safety check D Check that your vehicle remains level when a loaded or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle has an abnormal nose−up or nose−down condition, and check for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other possible causes. D Make sure the trailer cargo is securely loaded so that it cannot shift. D Check that your rear view mirrors conform to any federal, state/provincial or local regulations. If they do not, install required rear view mirrors appropriate for towing purposes. 258 D Backing with a trailer is difficult and requires practice. Grip the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the left to move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to move the trailer to the right. (This procedure is generally opposite to that when backing without a trailer.) Also, just turn the steering wheel a little at a time, avoiding sharp or prolonged turning. Have someone guide you when backing to reduce the risk of an accident. D Because stopping distance may be increased, vehicle−to−vehicle distance should be increased when towing a trailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) of speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length between you and the vehicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing and loss of control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces. DRIVING TIPS D Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration. D Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns. The trailer could hit your vehicle in a tight turn. Slow down before making a turn to avoid the need of sudden braking. D Remember that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Therefore, compensate for this by making a larger than normal turning radius with your vehicle. D Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Pay attention to the rear from time to time to prepare yourself for being passed by large trucks or buses, which may cause your vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying happens, firmly grip the steering wheel and reduce speed immediately but gradually. Never increase speed. If it is necessary to reduce speed, brake slowly. Steer straight ahead. If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle and trailer will stabilize. D Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing requires considerable distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of your trailer and be sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes. D In order to maintain efficient engine braking and electrical charging performance, do not use overdrive. D Because of the added load of the trailer, your vehicle’s engine may overheat on hot days (at temperatures over 30_C [85_F]) when going up a long or steep grade with a trailer. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in use), pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot. See “If your vehicle overheats” on page 269. D Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly. Put the transmission in “P”. Avoid parking on a slope with a trailer, but if it cannot be avoided, do so only after performing the following: 1. Apply the brakes and keep them applied. 2. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer wheels. 3. When the wheel blocks are in place, release your brakes slowly until the blocks absorb the load. 4. Apply the parking brake firmly. 5. Shift into “P” and turn off the engine. When restarting out after parking on a slope: 1. With the transmission in “P” position, start the engine. Be sure to keep the brake pedal depressed. 2. Shift into the “3”, “2”, “L” or “R” position. 259 DRIVING TIPS 3. Release the parking brake and brake pedal and slowly pull or back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply your brakes. 4. Have someone retrieve the blocks. CAUTION D Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) or the posted towing speed limit, whichever is lower. Because instability (swaying) of a towing vehicle−trailer combination usually increases as the speed increases, exceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) may cause loss of control. D Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill grades. Do not make sudden downshifts. D Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency. HOW TO SAVE FUEL AND MAKE YOUR VEHICLE LAST LONGER Improving fuel economy is easy − just take it easy. It will help make your vehicle last longer, too. Here are some specific tips on how to save money on both fuel and repairs: D Keep your tires inflated at the correct pressure. Check the pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month. Underinflation causes tire wear and wastes fuel. D Do not carry unneeded weight in your vehicle. Excess weight puts a heavier load on the engine, causing greater fuel consumption. D Avoid lengthy warm−up idling. Once the engine is running smoothly, begin driving − but gently. Remember, however, that on cold winter days this may take a little longer. D Always drive with the automatic transmission selector lever in the “D” position when engine braking is not required. Driving with the overdrive off will reduce the fuel economy. (For details, see “Automatic transmission” on page 227.) D Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Avoid jackrabbit starts. D Avoid long engine idling. If you have a long wait and you are not in traffic, it is better to turn off the engine and start again later. 260 DRIVING TIPS D Avoid engine over−revving. Use a gear position suitable for the road on which you are traveling. D Avoid continuous speeding up and slowing down. Stop−and−go driving wastes fuel. D Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a steady pace. Try to time the traffic signals so you only need to stop as little as possible or take advantage of through streets to avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper distance from other vehicles to avoid sudden braking. This will also reduce wear on your brakes. D Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jams whenever possible. D Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal. This causes premature wear, overheating and poor fuel economy. D Maintain a moderate speed on highways. The faster you drive, the greater the fuel consumption. By reducing your speed, you will cut down on fuel consumption. D Keep your vehicle tuned−up and in top shape. A dirty air cleaner, improper valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oil and grease, brakes not adjusted, etc. all lower engine performance and contribute to poor fuel economy. For longer life of all parts and lower operating costs, keep all maintenance work on schedule, and if you often drive under severe conditions, see that your vehicle receives more frequent maintenance. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner ’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.) CAUTION Never turn off the engine to coast down hills. Your power steering and brake booster will not function without the engine running. Also, the emission control system operates properly only when the engine is running. D Keep the front wheels in proper alignment. Avoid hitting the curb and slow down on rough roads. Improper alignment not only causes faster tire wear but also puts an extra load on the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel. D Keep the bottom of your vehicle free from mud etc. This not only lessens weight but also helps prevent corrosion. 261 DRIVING TIPS 262 SECTION 4 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY In case of an emergency If your engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot increase the engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle becomes stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle needs to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you lose your keys or lock yourself out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 264 268 269 270 277 278 284 285 263 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY IF YOUR ENGINE STALLS WHILE DRIVING If your engine stalls while driving ... 1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place. 2. Turn on your emergency flashers. 3. Try starting the engine again. If the engine will not start, see “If your vehicle will not start”. CAUTION If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not work, so steering and braking will be much harder than usual. IF YOUR VEHICLE WILL NOT START (a) Simple checks Before making these checks, make sure you have followed the correct starting procedure instructions in “How to start the engine” on page 226 and that you have sufficient fuel. Since your vehicle is equipped with the engine immobiliser system, also check whether the other keys will start the engine. If they work, your key may be broken. Have the key checked at your Lexus dealer. If none of your keys work, the system is possibly broken. Call your Lexus dealer. See “Keys” on page 10. If the engine is not turning over or is turning over too slowly − 1. Check that the battery terminals are tight and clean. 2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch on the interior light. 3. If the light is out, dim or goes out when the starter is cranked, the battery is discharged. You may try jump starting. See “(c) Jump starting” for further instruction. If the light is O.K., but the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair. Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer Service Assistance. (See “Foreword”.) 264 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY NOTICE Do not pull− or push−start the vehicle. It may damage the vehicle or cause a collision when the engine starts. Also the three−way catalytic converter may overheat and become a fire hazard. If the engine turns over at its normal speed but will not start − 1. The engine may be flooded because of repeated cranking. See “(b) Starting a flooded engine” for further instructions. 2. If the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair. Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer Service Assistance. (See “Foreword”.) (b) Starting a flooded engine If the engine will not start, your engine may be flooded because of repeated cranking. If this happens, turn the key to “START” with the accelerator pedal held down. Continue this operation for 30 seconds and then stop cranking. Then try starting the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal. If the engine does not start after 30 seconds of cranking, release the key, wait a few minutes and try again. If the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair. Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer Service Assistance. (See “Foreword”.) NOTICE Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat the starter and wiring systems. 265 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY (c) Jump starting To avoid serious personal injury and damage to your vehicle which might result from battery explosion, acid burns, electrical burns, or damaged electronic components, these instructions must be followed precisely. If you are unsure about how to follow this procedure, we strongly recommend that you seek help from your Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer Service Assistance. (See “Foreword”.) CAUTION D Batteries contain sulfuric acid which is poisonous and corrosive. Wear protective safety glasses when jump starting, and avoid spilling acid on your skin, clothing, or vehicle. D If you should accidentally get acid on yourself or in your eyes, remove any contaminated clothing and flush the affected area with water immediately. Then get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while en route to the medical office. D The gas normally produced by a battery will explode if a flame or spark is brought near. Use only standardized jumper cables and do not smoke or light a match while jump starting. 266 D Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. NOTICE The battery used for boosting must be 12 V. Do not jump start unless you are sure that the booster battery is correct. IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY 2. If required, remove all the vent plugs from the booster battery. Lay a cloth over the open vents on the booster battery. (This helps reduce the explosion hazard, personal injuries and burns.) If the booster battery is an extended maintenance interval battery, it is not necessary to remove the vent plugs. 40E128 3. If the engine in the vehicle with the booster battery is not running, start it and let it run for about 5 minutes. During jump starting, run the engine at about 2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal lightly depressed. 4. Locate positive (+) and negative (−) terminals of each battery. Connect the jumper cables in the exact order ( 1 2 3 4 ) shown in the illustration. " 5 Discharged battery 6 Booster battery JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE 1 Connect a positive (red) jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery. 2 Connect the clamp at the other end of the positive (red) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery. 3 Connect a negative (black) cable clamp to the negative (−) terminal of the booster battery. 4 Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative (black) cable to a solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point (e.g. cylinder head) away from the battery. Do not connect it to or near any part that moves when the engine is cranked. 1. If the booster battery is installed in another vehicle, make sure the vehicles are not touching. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories. 267 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY CAUTION IF YOU CANNOT INCREASE THE ENGINE SPEED When making the connections, to avoid serious injury, do not lean over the battery or accidentally let the jumper cables or clamps touch anything except the correct battery terminals or the ground. If the engine speed does not increase with the accelerator pedal depressed down, there may be a problem somewhere in your electronic throttle control system. 5. Start your engine in the normal way. After starting, run it at about 2000 rpm for several minutes with the accelerator pedal lightly depressed. At this time, vibration may occur. However, if you depress the accelerator pedal more firmly and slowly, you can drive your vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. 6. Carefully disconnect the cables in the exact reverse order: the negative cable and then the positive cable. 7. Carefully dispose of the battery cover cloths which may now contain sulfuric acid. Even if the abnormality of the electronic throttle control system is corrected during low speed driving, the system may not be recovered until the engine is stopped and the ignition key is turned to “ACC” or “LOCK” position. 8. If removed, replace all the battery vent plugs. If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent (for example, lights left on), you should have it checked at your Lexus dealer. 268 CAUTION Be especially careful to prevent erroneous pedal operation. IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS If your engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating, if you experience a loss of power, or if you hear a loud knocking or pinging noise, the engine has probably overheated. When the engine overheats Pull safely off the road, stop the vehicle and turn on your emergency flashers. Put the transmission in “P” and apply the parking brake. CAUTION D When the engine is running, keep hands and clothing away from the moving fan and engine drive belt. D Do not attempt to remove the radiator cap when the engine and radiator are hot. Serious injury could result from scalding hot fluid and steam blown out under pressure. A: If steam is coming from your engine: If the cooling fan is not operating or the coolant is not in the acceptable range, turn off the engine and call your Lexus dealer. Turn off the engine. Leave the hood closed until there is no sign of steam or coolant. Your engine could have been seriously damaged already. Call your Lexus dealer for assistance. If both conditions are O.K., after the engine coolant temperature has cooled to normal, continue driving your vehicle. CAUTION If the engine coolant temperature does not cool down, or your vehicle overheats again, have it checked as soon as possible by your Lexus dealer. To help avoid personal injury, keep the hood closed until there is no steam. Escaping steam or coolant is sign of very high pressure. B: If no steam is coming from your engine: Leave the engine running and turn off the air conditioning. Check the following. D Is the cooling fan operating? D Is the coolant in the acceptable range? 269 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE 1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place − well away from the traffic. Avoid stopping on the center divider of a highway. Park on a level spot with firm ground. 2. Stop the engine and turn on your emergency flashers. D Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone. 3. Firmly set the parking brake and put the transmission in “P”. D Use the jack only for lifting your vehicle during wheel changing. 4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle on the side away from traffic. D Do not raise the vehicle with someone in the vehicle. 5. Read the following instructions thoroughly. D When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the jack. CAUTION D Raise the vehicle only high enough to remove and change the tire. When jacking, be sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of personal injury: NOTICE D Follow jacking instructions. D Do not put any part of your body under a vehicle supported by a jack. Otherwise, personal injury may occur. D Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack. D Stop the vehicle on a level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put the transmission in “P”. Block the wheel diagonally opposite to the one being changed if necessary. 270 D Make sure to set the jack properly in the jack point. Raising the vehicle with jack improperly positioned will damage the vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack and cause personal injury. Do not continue driving with a deflated tire. Driving even a short distance can damage a tire and wheel beyond repair. IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY 1. Lift up the deck board and hang the deck board hook on the right hinge of the trunk lid. " 1 Spare tire 2 Jack handle 4 Jack 5 Towing eyelet 3 Wrench Make sure the board does not fall down. 2. Get the jack, wrench and spare tire. When closing the board, replace the hook in its original position. To prepare yourself for an emergency, you should familiarize yourself with the use of the jack and each tool, and their storage locations. The jack handle and wrench are attached at the reverse side of the cover. 271 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY " 1 Joint 2 When removing the jack, turn the joint by hand in the “contract” direction until the jack is free. 3 When storing, turn the joint by hand in the “expand” direction until the jack is firmly secured to prevent it from flying forward during a collision or sudden braking. 272 To remove the spare tire: 1 Remove the spare tire cover. 2 Loosen the bolt and remove it. When storing the spare tire, place it with the inner side of the wheel facing up. Then bolt the tire in place and install the spare tire cover to prevent the tire from flying forward during a collision or sudden braking. IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY 3. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to keep the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up. When blocking the wheel, place a wheel block in front of one of the front wheels or behind one of the rear wheels. 4. Loosen all the wheel nuts. Always loosen the wheel nuts before raising the vehicle. Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise to loosen them. To get maximum leverage, fit the wrench to the nut so that the handle is on the right side, as shown above. Grab the wrench near the end of the handle and pull up on the handle. Be careful that the wrench does not slip off the nut. Do not remove the nuts yet − just unscrew them about one−half turn. CAUTION Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts. The nuts may loose and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident. 273 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY 5. Position the jack at the jack points as shown. Rotate the load rest 90_ from storage position to lifting position. 6. After making sure no one is in the vehicle, raise it high enough so that the spare tire can be installed. Make sure the jack is positioned on a level and solid surface. Allow for the fact that you need more ground clearance when putting on the spare tire than when removing the flat tire. To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle into the jack (it is a loose fit) and turn it clockwise. As the jack touches the vehicle and begins to lift, double−check that it is properly positioned. CAUTION Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone. 274 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY 7. Remove the wheel nuts and remove the flat tire. 8. Reinstall all the wheel nuts finger tight. Lift the flat tire straight off and put it aside. Align the holes in the wheel with the bolts. Then lift up the wheel and get at least the top bolt started through its hole. Wiggle the tire and press it back over the other bolts. Reinstall the wheel nuts and tighten them as much as you can by hand. Press the tire back and see if you can tighten them more. CAUTION Before putting on the wheel, remove any corrosion on the mounting surfaces with a wire brush or such. Installation of wheels without good metal−to−metal contact at the mounting surface can cause wheel nuts to loosen and eventually cause a wheel to come off while driving. Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts. Doing so may lead to overtightening the nuts and damaging the bolts. The nuts may loose and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident. If there is oil or grease on any bolt or nut, clean it. 275 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY CAUTION D When lowering the vehicle, make sure all portions of your body and all other persons around will not be injured as the vehicle is lowered to the ground. D Have the wheel nuts tightened by torque wrench at 103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf), as soon as possible after changing wheels. Otherwise, the nuts may loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident. 9. Lower the vehicle completely and tighten the wheel nuts. 10.After changing the wheel, check the air pressure of the replaced tire. Stow all the tools, jack and flat tire securely. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the vehicle. If the pressure of the replaced tire is low, drive slowly to the nearest service station and fill to the correct pressure. Use only the wheel nut wrench to tighten the nuts. Do not use other tools or any additional leverage other than your hands, such as a hammer, pipe or your foot. Make sure the wrench is securely engaged over the nut. Tighten each nut a little at a time in the order shown. Repeat the process until all the nuts are tight. Do not forget to reinstall the tire valve cap as dirt and moisture could get into the valve core and possible cause air leakage. If the cap is missing, put a new one on as soon as possible. This is the same procedure for changing or rotating your tires. CAUTION Before driving, make sure all the tools, jack and flat tire are securely in place in their storage location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision or sudden braking. 276 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY IF YOUR VEHICLE BECOMES STUCK If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it forward and backward. If your vehicle is equipped with the traction control system, turn off the system to become unstuck. (For details, see “Traction control system” on page 237.) CAUTION Do not attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it forward and backward if people or objects are anywhere near the vehicle. During the rocking operation the vehicle may suddenly move forward or backward as it becomes unstuck, causing injury or damage to nearby people or objects. NOTICE If you rock your vehicle, observe the following precautions to prevent damage to the transmission and other parts. D Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting the selector lever or before the transmission is completely shifted to forward or reverse gear. D Do not race the engine and avoid spinning the wheels. D If your vehicle remains stuck after rocking the vehicle several times, consider other ways such as towing. 277 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY IF YOUR VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE TOWED (a) Towing with a wheel lift type truck D From front If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by your Lexus dealer or a commercial tow truck service. In consultation with them, have your vehicle towed using either (a) or (b). (a) Towing with a wheel lift type truck (b) Using a flat bed truck (c) Never tow with a sling type truck Only when you cannot receive a towing service from a Lexus dealer or commercial tow truck service, tow your vehicle carefully in accordance with the instructions given in “(d) Emergency towing” on page 282. Proper equipment will help ensure that your vehicle is not damaged while being towed. Commercial operators are generally aware of the state/provincial and local laws pertaining to towing. Your vehicle can be damaged if it is towed incorrectly. Although most operators know the correct procedure, it is possible to make a mistake. To avoid damage to your vehicle, make sure the following precautions are observed. If necessary, show this page to the tow truck driver. TOWING PRECAUTIONS: Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by the state/provincial and local laws. The wheels and axle on the ground must be in good condition. If they are damaged, use a towing dolly. 278 Release the parking brake. NOTICE When lifting wheels, take care to ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Otherwise, the bumper and/or underbody of the towed vehicle will be damaged during towing. IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY D From rear (b) Using a flat bed truck Use a towing dolly under the front wheels. D Tie down points NOTICE Never tow a vehicle with an automatic transmission from the rear with front wheels on the ground, as this may cause serious damage to the transmission. 279 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY If your Lexus is transported by a flat bed, it should be tied down at locations A and B as shown above. "Rear emergency towing eyelets NOTICE Do not use the rear emergency towing eyelets. 280 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY D Tie down angle If you use chains or wires to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded black must be at 45_. (c) Towing with a sling type truck NOTICE Do not tow with a sling type truck, either from the front or rear. This may cause body damage. 281 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY (d) Emergency towing Towing in this manner may be done only on hard−surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the wheels, axles, drive train, steering and brakes must all be in good condition. CAUTION Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which would place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelet and towing cable or chain. The eyelet and towing cable or chain may break and cause serious injury or damage. If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by your Lexus dealer or a commercial tow truck service. NOTICE If towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed by a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing eyelet. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. Use only a cable or chain specifically intended for use in towing vehicles. Securely fasten the cable or chain to the towing eyelet provided. To install the front towing eyelet, see “(e) Installing front towing eyelet” on page 283. Before towing, release the parking brake and put the transmission in “N”. The ignition key must be in “ACC” (engine off) or “ON” (engine running). NOTICE Only use specified towing eyelet; otherwise your vehicle may be damaged. A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes. 282 CAUTION If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not work so steering and braking will be much harder than usual. IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY (e) Installing front towing eyelet 1. Remove the front towing eyelet cover on the front bumper using a flat−bladed screwdriver. To protect the bodywork, place a piece of rag over the cover. 2. Use the front towing eyelet in the trunk. Secure it to the hole on the bumper by turning clockwise. (For the eyelet location, see page 271.) 283 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY IF YOU CANNOT SHIFT AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SELECTOR LEVER 3. Tighten the front towing eyelet securely by a wheel nut wrench. CAUTION When installing the eyelet on the vehicle, be sure to tighten the front eyelet securely. If the tightening is loose, it may come off when being towed and result in death or serious injury. 284 If you cannot shift the selector lever out of “P” position to other positions even though the brake pedal is depressed, use the shift lock override button as follows: 1 Turn the ignition key to “LOCK”. Make sure the parking brake is applied. 2 Pry up the cover with a flat−bladed screwdriver or equivalent. IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS OR LOCK YOURSELF OUT You can purchase a new key at your Lexus dealer if you can give them the key number and master key, because your vehicle is equipped with the engine immobiliser system. Even if you lose only one key, contact your Lexus dealer to make a new key. However, if you lose all your master keys, the dealer cannot duplicate key but only replace the whole system. 3 Push down the shift lock override button. You can shift out of “P” position only while pushing the button. 4 Shift into “N” position. Insert the cover. Start the engine. For your safety, keep the brake pedal depressed. Be sure to have the system checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. See the suggestion given in “Keys” on page 10. You can use the wireless remote control system with the new key. Contact your Lexus dealer for detailed information. If your keys are locked in the vehicle and you cannot get a duplicate, many Lexus dealers can still open the door for you, using their special tools. If you must break a window to get in, we suggest breaking the smallest side window because it is the least expensive to replace. Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts from the glass. 285 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY 286 SECTION 5 MAINTENANCE Maintenance Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Does your vehicle need repairing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs . . . . . . . . 288 289 292 293 For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”. 287 MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS Your Lexus vehicle has been designed to have fewer maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save both your time and money. However, each regular maintenance as well as day−to−day care is more important than ever before to ensure smooth, trouble−free, safe, and economical driving. It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure the specified maintenance, including general maintenance services, is performed. Note that both the new vehicle and emission control system warranties specify that proper maintenance and care must be performed. See the “Owner’s Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet” for complete warranty information. General maintenance General maintenance items are those day−to−day care practices that are important to your vehicle for proper operation. It is the owner’s responsibility to ensure that the general maintenance items are performed regularly. These checks or inspections can be done either by yourself or your Lexus dealer. 288 Scheduled maintenance The scheduled maintenance items listed in the “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance” are those required to be serviced at regular intervals. For details of your maintenance schedule, read the “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”. It is recommended that any replacement parts used for maintenance or for the repair of the emission control system be Lexus supplied. The owner may elect to use non−Lexus supplied parts for replacement purposes without invalidating the emission control system warranty. However, use of replacement parts which are not of equivalent quality may impair the effectiveness of the emission control systems. You may also elect to have maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and system performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual without invalidating this warranty. See “Owner’s Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet” for complete warranty information. MAINTENANCE Where to go for service? GENERAL MAINTENANCE Lexus technicians are well−trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and in−dealership training programs. They are well informed about the operation of all the systems on your vehicle. Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified. It is recommended that any problem you notice be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for their advice. You can be confident that your Lexus dealer’s service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements of your vehicle. CAUTION Your copy of the repair order is proof that all required maintenance has been performed for warranty coverage. And if any problems should arise with your vehicle while under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it. Again, be sure to keep a copy of the repair order for any service performed on your Lexus. What about do−it−yourself maintenance? Many of the maintenance items are easy to do yourself, if you have a little mechanical ability and a few basic automotive tools. Simple instructions for how to perform them are presented in Section 6. If you are a skilled do−it−yourself mechanic, the Lexus service manuals are recommended. Please be aware that do−it−yourself maintenance can affect your warranty coverage. See your “Owner’s Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet” for the details. Make these checks only where adequate ventilation can be obtained if you run the engine. Vehicle exterior Items listed below should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified. Tire pressure Check the pressure with a gauge every two weeks, or at least once a month and adjust as shown on the tire pressure label. See page 324 for additional information. Tire surface Check the tires carefully for cuts, damage or excessive wear. See page 326 for additional information. Wheel nuts When checking the tires, make sure to check the nuts for looseness. Tighten them if necessary. 289 MAINTENANCE Tire rotation Vehicle interior Rotate the tires according to the maintenance schedule. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.) See page 326 for additional information. Items listed below should be checked regularly, e.g. while performing periodic services, cleaning the vehicle, etc. Fluid leaks Make sure the headlight, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are working. Check headlight aim. Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, water or other fluid after the vehicle has been parked for a while. If you smell fuel fumes or notice any leak, have the cause found and corrected immediately. Lights Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers Check that all service reminder indicators and warning buzzers function properly. Doors and engine hood Steering wheel Check that all doors, including trunk lid, operate smoothly and all latches lock securely. Make sure the engine hood secondary latch secures the hood when the primary latch is released. Check that it has the specified freeplay. Be alert for changes in steering condition, such as hard steering, excessive freeplay or strange noise. Seats Check that all front seat controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. operate smoothly. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold securely in any latched position. Seat belts Check that the seat belt system such as buckles, retractors and anchors operate properly and smoothly. Make sure the belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged. 290 MAINTENANCE Accelerator pedal Engine compartment Check the pedal for smooth operation and uneven pedal effort or catching. Items listed below should be checked from time to time, e.g. each time when refueling. Brake pedal Washer fluid Check the pedal for smooth operation and the proper clearance and freeplay. Check the brake booster function. Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the tank. See page 348 for additional information. Brakes Engine coolant level At a safe place, check that the brakes do not pull to one side when applied. Make sure the coolant level is between the “F” and “L” lines on the see−through reservoir when the engine is cold. See page 315 for additional information. Parking brake Check that the pedal has the proper travel and that, on a safe incline, your vehicle is held securely with only the parking brake applied. Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism On a safe incline, check that your vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in “P” position and all brakes released. Radiator, condenser and hoses Check that the front of the radiator and condenser are clean and not blocked with leaves, dirt, or insects. See page 317 for additional information. Battery Check the battery condition by the indicator color. See page 341 for additional information. Brake fluid level Make sure the brake fluid level is correct. See page 322 for additional information. Engine oil level Check the level on the dipstick with the engine turned off and the vehicle parked on a level spot. See page 312 for additional information. 291 MAINTENANCE Power steering fluid level Check the level through the reservoir. The level should be in the “HOT” or “COLD” range depending on the fluid temperature. See page 323 for additional information. Exhaust system If you notice any change in the sound of the exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, have the cause located and corrected immediately. (See “Engine exhaust caution” on page 223.) DOES YOUR VEHICLE NEED REPAIRING? Be on the alert for changes in performance and sounds, and visual tip−offs that indicate service is needed. Some important clues are: D Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging D Appreciable loss of power D Strange engine noises D A fluid leak under the vehicle (However, water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.) D Change in exhaust sound (This may indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide leak. Drive with the windows open and have the exhaust system checked immediately.) D Flat−looking tires, excessive tire squeal when cornering, uneven tire wear D Vehicle pulls to one side when driving straight on a level road D Strange noises related to suspension movement D Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling brake pedal, pedal almost touches floors, vehicle pulls to one side when braking D Engine coolant temperature continually higher than normal 292 MAINTENANCE If you notice any of these clues, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. It probably needs adjustment or repair. EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE (I/M) PROGRAMS CAUTION Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On−Board Diagnostics) checks. Do not continue driving with the vehicle unchecked. It could result in serious vehicle damage and possibly personal injury. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system. When the OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system, the malfunction indicator lamp comes on. In this case, your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle. Even if the malfunction indicator lamp does not come on, your vehicle may not pass the I/M test as readiness codes have not been set in the OBD system. Readiness codes are automatically set during ordinary driving. However, when the battery is disconnected or run down, the codes are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the codes may not be completely set. Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had come on recently due to temporary malfunction such as a loose fuel tank cap, your vehicle may not pass the I/M test. The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips, but the error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless about 40 trips or more are taken. If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test even the malfunction indicator lamp does not come on, contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re−testing. 293 MAINTENANCE 294 SECTION 6–1 SERVICE PROCEDURES AND SPECIFICATIONS Introduction Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine compartment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Do−it−yourself service precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning the jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 297 298 299 301 295 INTRODUCTION VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also on the Certification Label. The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This number is on the left top of the instrument panel and can be seen through the windshield from outside. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle. The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown. 296 INTRODUCTION ENGINE COMPARTMENT OVERVIEW 1 Power steering fluid reservoir 2 Engine oil filler cap 3 Brake fluid reservoir 4 Fuse box 5 Battery 6 Fuse box 7 Radiator 8 Condenser 9 Electric cooling fans 10 Engine oil level dipstick 11 Washer fluid tank 12 Engine coolant reservoir 297 INTRODUCTION DO−IT−YOURSELF SERVICE PRECAUTIONS If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure given in this section. You should be aware that improper or incomplete servicing may result in operating problems. Performing do−it−yourself maintenance during the warranty period may affect your warranty coverage. Read the separate Lexus Warranty statement for details and suggestions. This section gives instructions only for those items that are relatively easy for an owner to perform. As explained in Section 5, there are still a number of items that must be performed by a qualified technician with special tools. For information on tools and parts for do−it−yourself maintenance, see “Parts and tools” on page 299. Utmost care should be taken when working on your vehicle to prevent accidental injury. Here are a few precautions that you should be especially careful to observe: CAUTION D When the engine is running, keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt. (Removing rings, watches, and ties is advisable.) D Right after driving, the engine compartment − the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold and power steering fluid reservoir, etc. − will be hot. So be careful not to touch them. Oil and other fluids may also be hot. D Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames around fuel or the battery. Their fumes are flammable. D Do not get under your vehicle with just the body jack supporting it. Always use automotive jack stands or other solid supports. D Be sure that the ignition is off if you work near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille. With the ignition on, the electric cooling fans will automatically start to run if the engine coolant temperature is high and/or the air conditioning is on. D Use eye protection whenever you work on or under your vehicle where you may be exposed to flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. 298 INTRODUCTION D Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid. D Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. NOTICE D Remember that battery and ignition cables carry high currents or voltages. Be careful of accidentally causing a short circuit. D Before closing the engine hood, check to see that you have not forgotten any tools, rags, etc. D Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, or excessive engine wear could result. Also backfiring could cause a fire in the engine compartment. D Do not overfill automatic transmission fluid, or the transmission could be damaged. D Be careful not to scratch the glass surface with the wiper frame. PARTS AND TOOLS Here is a list of parts and tools you will need to perform do−it−yourself maintenance. Remember all Lexus parts are designed in metric sizes, so your tools must be metric. Checking the engine oil level Parts (if level is low): D “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equvalent See page 314 for details about engine oil selection. Tools: D Rag or paper towel D Funnel (only for adding oil) Checking the engine coolant level Parts (if level is low): D “Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” or equivalent See “Checking the engine coolant level” on page 315 for instructions. D Demineralized or distilled water Tools: D Funnel (only for adding coolant) 299 INTRODUCTION Checking brake fluid Checking the cartridge type fuses Parts (if level is low): Parts (if replacement is necessary): D FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid D Genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent with same amperage rating as original Tools: D Funnel (only for adding fluid) Adding washer fluid Checking power steering fluid Parts: Parts (if level is low): D Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONRII or III Tools: D Rag or paper towel D Funnel (only for adding fluid) Checking battery condition Tools: D Warm water D Baking soda D Grease D Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts) Checking and replacing the blade type fuses Parts (if replacement is necessary): D Fuse with same amperage rating as original 300 D Water D Washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use) Tools: D Funnel INTRODUCTION POSITIONING THE JACK CAUTION When jacking, be sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of personal injury: D Follow jacking instructions. D Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by the jack. Personal injury may occur. D Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack. "Front D Stop the vehicle on a level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put the transmission in “P”. Block the wheels on the opposite side of the jack up point if necessary. D Make sure to set the jack properly in the jack point. Raising the vehicle with jack improperly positioned will damage the vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack and cause personal injury. D Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone; use vehicle support stands. D Do not raise the vehicle with someone in the vehicle. D When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the jack. "Rear When jacking up your vehicle with the jack, position the jack correctly as shown in the illustrations. NOTICE 301 INTRODUCTION Make sure to place the jack correctly, or your vehicle may be damaged. 302 INTRODUCTION 303 SECTION 6–2 SERVICE PROCEDURES AND SPECIFICATIONS Engine Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Facts about engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the radiator and condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 305 308 310 311 312 315 317 317 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS − GENERAL Model 1MZ − FE Type 6 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline Bore and stroke 87.5 Displacement 2995 cm3 (182.8 cu. in.) Valve clearance (engine cold) Intake Exhaust 0.15 − 0.25 mm (0.006 − 0.010 in.) 0.25 − 0.35 mm (0.010 − 0.014 in.) Drive belt tension (with Borroughs drive belt tension gauge No. BT−33−73F) 115 " 20 lb. − FUEL Fuel type Octane Rating 83 mm (3.44 3.27 in.) Only UNLEADED 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher 305 ENGINE − LUBRICATION SYSTEM Oil capacity Drain and refill With filter Without filter 4.7 L (5.0 qt., 4.1 lmp. qt.) 4.5 L (4.8 qt., 4.0 lmp. qt.) Oil grade API grade SL “Energy−Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil Recommended oil viscosity (SAE): 62Z002 Outside temperature NOTE: “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is filled in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the above grade and viscosity. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details. 306 ENGINE − COOLING SYSTEM Capacity 9.2 L (9.7 qt., 8.2 lmp. qt.) Coolant type “Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” or equivalent With ethylene−glycol type coolant for a proper corrosion protection of aluminum components Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or plain water alone. NOTE: “Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” is filled in your Lexus vehicle. In order to avoid technical problems, we strongly recommend using “Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” or equivalent. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details. − IGNITION SYSTEM Spark plug − Make − Gap DENSO NGK − ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Battery Open voltage at 20_C (68_F): Charging rates SK20R11 IFR6A11 1.1 mm (0.043 in.) 12.7 V Fully charged 12.3 V Half charged 11.9 V Discharged [Voltage that is checked 20 minutes after the key is removed with all the lights turned off] 5 A max. 307 ENGINE FUEL Fuel type Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline. To help prevent gas station mixups, your Lexus has a smaller fuel tank opening. The special nozzle on pumps with unleaded fuel will fit it, but the larger standard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas will not. At a minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5−M93 in Canada. Use of unleaded fuel with an Octane Rating or Research Octane Number lower than stated above will cause persistent heavy knocking. If it is severe, this will lead to engine damage. If your engine knocks ... If you detect heavy knocking even when using the recommended fuel, or if you hear steady knocking while holding a steady speed on level roads, consult your Lexus dealer. However, occasionally, you may notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is normal and there is no need for concern. Gasolines containing detergent additives NOTICE Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of leaded gasoline will cause the three−way catalytic converter to lose its effectiveness and the emission control system to function improperly. Also, this can increase maintenance costs. Octane rating Select Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. For improved vehicle performance, the use of premium unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher is recommended. 308 Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contain detergent additives to avoid build−up of engine deposits. For further details, ask your Lexus dealer or a local gasoline retailer. Quality gasoline Automobile manufacturers in U.S., Europe and Japan have developed a specification for quality fuel named World−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is expected to be applied world wide. The WWFC consists of three categories that depend on required emission levels. In the U.S., category 3 has been adopted. The WWFC improves air quality by providing for better emissions in vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction through better vehicle performance. ENGINE Cleaner burning gasoline Gasoline quality Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE is available in many areas. In a very few cases, you may experience driveability problems caused by the particular gasoline that you are using. If you continue to have unacceptable driveability, try changing gasoline brands. If this does not rectify your problem, then consult your Lexus dealer. Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions, and improve air quality. Oxygenates in gasoline Lexus allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate content is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE. If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87. Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol. NOTICE D Do not use gasohol other than stated above. It will cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems. D If drivability problems are encountered (poor hot starting, vaporizing, engine knock, etc.), discontinue its use. D Take care not to spill gasohol during refueling. Gasohol may cause paint damage. Gasoline containing MMT Some gasoline contain an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). Fuel tank capacity 70 L (18.5 gal., 15.4 lmp. gal.) Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service. 309 ENGINE FACTS ABOUT ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION Functions of engine oil Engine oil has the primary function of lubricating and cooling the inside of the engine, and plays a major role in maintaining the engine in proper working order. Engine oil consumption It is normal that an engine should consume some engine oil during normal engine operation. The causes of oil consumption in a normal engine are as follows. D Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston rings and cylinders. A thin film of oil is left on the cylinder wall when a piston moves downwards in the cylinder. High negative pressure generated when the vehicle is decelerating sucks some of this oil into the combustion chamber. This oil as well as some part of the oil film left on the cylinder wall is burned by the high temperature combustion gases during the combustion process. D Oil is also used to lubricate the stems of the intake valves. Some of this oil is sucked into the combustion chamber together with the intake air and is burned along with the fuel. High temperature exhaust gases also burn the oil used to lubricate the exhaust valve stems. The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the viscosity of the oil, the quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven. 310 More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and frequent acceleration and deceleration. A new engine consumes more oil, since its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls have not become conditioned. When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately. For example, if a vehicle is used for repeated short trips and consumes a normal amount of oil, the dipstick may not show any drop in the oil level at all, even after 1000 km (600 miles) or more. This is because the oil is gradually becoming diluted with fuel or moisture, making it appear that the oil level has not changed. The diluting ingredients evaporate out when the vehicle is then driven at high speeds, as on an expressway, making it appear that oil is excessively consumed after driving at high speeds. ENGINE Importance of engine oil level check One of the most important points in proper vehicle maintenance is to keep the engine oil at the optimum level so that oil function will not be impaired. Therefore, it is essential that the oil level be checked regularly. Lexus recommends that the oil level be checked every time you refuel the vehicle. NOTICE Failure to check the oil level regularly could lead to serious engine trouble due to insufficient oil. For detailed information on oil level check, see “Checking the engine oil level” on page 312. USED ENGINE OIL CAUTION D Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact with it. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water. D Do not leave used oil within the reach of children. D Dispose of used oil and used oil filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and used oil filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your Lexus dealer or a service station for information concerning recycling or disposal. 311 ENGINE CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL " 1 Add oil 3 Too full With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick. 4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil level while holding a rag under the end. If it is between the low level mark ( 4 ) and the full level mark ( 5 ), it is O.K. 1. To get a true reading, the vehicle should be on a level spot. After turning off the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine. NOTICE 2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag under the end and wipe it clean. Be careful not to drop the engine oil on the vehicle components. 3. Reinsert the dipstick and push it in as far as it will go, or the reading will not be correct. 312 2 O.K. ENGINE NOTICE D Be careful not to spill the engine oil on the vehicle components. D Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged. Check the oil level on the dipstick once again after adding the oil. If the oil level is below or only slightly above the low mark, add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine. Remove the oil filler cap and add engine oil a little at a time, checking the dipstick. We recommend that you use a funnel when adding oil. The approximate quantity of oil needed to fill between the low level mark and the full level mark on the dipstick is indicated below for reference. When the level reaches within the correct range, return the filler cap and turn the cap clockwise until you hear a click. Oil quantity, L (qt., lmp. qt.) 1.5 (1.6, 1.3) 313 ENGINE Engine oil selection Oil identification marks “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is filled in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity. Oil grade: API grade SL “Energy−Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil Recommended viscosity: SAE 5W−30 SOIL11 62Z002 "API Service Symbol "ILSAC Certification Mark Either or both API registered marks are added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use. Outside temperature SAE 5W−30 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather. If SAE 5W−30 is not available, SAE 10W−30 may be used. However, it should be replaced with SAE 5W−30 at the next oil change. D The API Service Symbol is located anywhere on the outside of the container. The top portion of the label shows the oil quality by API (American Petroleum Institute) designation such as SL. The center portion of the label shows the SAE viscosity grade such as SAE 5W−30. “Energy−Conserving”, shown in the lower portion, indicates that the oil has fuel−saving capabilities. D The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee) Certification Mark is displayed on the front of the container. 314 ENGINE To ensure excellent lubrication performance for your engine, the “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” range is available, which has been specifically tested and approved for all Lexus engines. CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details of the “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” range. " 1 Reservoir cap 2 Upper line 3 Lower line Look at the see−through coolant reservoir when the engine is cold. The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir. If the level is low, add ethylene−glycol type coolant for a proper corrosion protection of aluminum components. The coolant level in the reservoir will vary with engine temperature. However, if the level is on or below the “L” line, add coolant. Bring the level up to the “F” line. Always use ethylene−glycol type coolant for a proper corrosion protection of aluminum components. See information in the next column. 315 ENGINE If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing, there may be a leak in the system. Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant filler cap, radiator cap and drain cock and water pump. If you can find no leak, have your Lexus dealer test the cap pressure and check for leaks in the cooling system. We recommend to use 50% solution for your Lexus, to provide protection down to about −35_C (−31_F). When it is extremely cold, to provide protection down to about −50_C (−58_F), 60% solution is recommended. Do not use more than 70% solution for better coolant performance. NOTICE CAUTION Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or plain water alone. To prevent burning yourself, do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. The engine cooling system is integral to maximizing performance of your Lexus vehicle. In line with this, it is strongly recommended that you use “Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” for protecting the system, as it is an ethylene−glycol based premium antifreeze coolant with excellent corrosion protection properties that has been specifically formulated for use in Lexus vehicles. Coolant type selection Use of improper coolants may damage your engine cooling system. Your coolant must contain ethylene−glycol type coolant for a proper corrosion protection of your engine that contains aluminum components. We have used “Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” in your Lexus vehicle. In order to avoid technical problems, we strongly recommend using “Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” or equivalent. In addition to preventing freezing and subsequent damage to the engine, this type of coolant will also prevent corrosion. Further supplemental inhibitors or additives are neither needed nor recommended. Read the coolant container for information on freeze protection. Follow the manufacturer’s directions for how much to mix with plain water (preferably demineralized water or distilled water). The total capacity of the cooling system is given on page 307. 316 Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details of the “Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” range. ENGINE CHECKING THE RADIATOR AND CONDENSER SPARK PLUGS If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, take your vehicle to Lexus dealer. CAUTION To prevent burning yourself, be careful not to touch the radiator, condenser or intercooler when the engine is hot. NOTICE To prevent damage to the radiator and condenser, do not perform the work by yourself. Your engine is fitted with iridium−tipped spark plugs. NOTICE Use only iridium−tipped spark plugs and do not adjust gaps for your engine performance and smooth drivability. 317 SECTION 6–3 SERVICE PROCEDURES AND SPECIFICATIONS Chassis Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aluminum wheel precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suspension and chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 319 322 323 324 326 326 329 330 331 332 CHASSIS SPECIFICATIONS − AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE Fluid capacity Drain and refill 3.1 L (3.3 qt., 2.7 lmp. qt.) Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF Type T−IV* *Change automatic transmission fluid only as necessary. Generally, it is necessary to change automatic transmission fluid only if your vehicle is driven under one of the Special Operating Conditions listed in your “Owner ’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”. When changing the automatic transmission fluid, use only “Toyota Genuine ATF Type T−IV” (ATF JWS3309 or NWS6500) to aid in assuring optimum transaxle performance. NOTICE Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF Type T−IV” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details. 319 CHASSIS − BRAKES Pedal clearance Fixed type Adjustable type (in frontmost position) 70 mm (2.8 in.) Min. *1 59 mm (2.3 in.) Min. *1 Pedal free play Fixed type Adjustable type (in frontmost position) 1 − 6 mm (0.04 − 0.24 in.) 1 − 8 mm (0.04 − 0.31 in.) Brake pad wear limit 1.0 mm (0.04 in.) Parking brake lining wear limit 1.0 mm (0.04 in.) Parking brake adjustment 3 − 6 clicks *2 Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 *1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf) with the engine running *2: Parking brake adjustment when depressed with the force of 294 N (30 kgf, 66 lbf) − STEERING 320 Wheel free play Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.) Power steering fluid type Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONRII or III CHASSIS − TIRES AND WHEELS Tire size Tire inflation pressure Recommended cold tire inflation pressure P215/60R16 94V Front 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2 or bar, 29 psi) Rear 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2 or bar, 29 psi) For sustained high speeds above 160 km/h (99 mph), in countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 40 kPa (0.4 kgf/cm2 or bar, 6 psi) to the front tires and rear tires, but never exceed the maximum cold tire pressure molded on the tire sidewall. Wheel size 16 6 1/2 JJ Wheel nut torque 103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf) NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire pressure” through “Aluminum wheel precautions” on pages 324 through 331. 321 CHASSIS CHECKING BRAKE FLUID CAUTION Take care when filling the reservoir because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted surfaces. If fluid gets in your hands or eyes, flush them with clean water immediately. If you still feel uncomfortable with your hands or eyes, go to the doctor. NOTICE To check the fluid level, simply look at the see−through reservoir. The level should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the tank. It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear. So be sure to keep the reservoir filled. If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious mechanical problem. If the level is low, add FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid to the brake reservoir. Remove and replace the reservoir cap by hand. Add brake fluid up to the “MAX” line. Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once opened, brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air, and excess moisture can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. 322 If you spill some of the fluid, be sure to wipe it off to prevent it from damaging the parts or paintwork. CHASSIS CHECKING POWER STEERING FLUID " 1 If cold O.K. 4 If hot add Check the fluid level through the reservoir. If necessary, add automatic transmission fluid DEXRONRII or III. If the vehicle has been driven around 80 km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a little more in frigid temperatures), the fluid is hot (60_C − 80_C or 140_F − 175_F). You may also check the level when the fluid is cold (about room temperature, 10_C − 30_C or 50_F − 85_F) if the engine has not been run for about five hours. 2 If cold add 3 If hot O.K. Clean all dirt off the reservoir and look at the fluid level. If the fluid is cold, the level should be in the “COLD” range. Similarly, if it is hot, the fluid level should be in the “HOT” range. If the level is at the low side of the appropriate range, add automatic transmission fluid DEXRONRII or III to bring the level within the range. To remove the reservoir cap, turn it counterclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it, turn it clockwise. After replacing the reservoir cap, visually check the steering box case, vane pump and hose connections for leaks or damage. CAUTION The reservoir may be hot so be careful not to burn yourself. 323 CHASSIS NOTICE CHECKING TIRE PRESSURE Avoid overfilling, or the power steering could be damaged. The recommended cold tire pressures, tire size and the vehicle capacity weight are given on the label. You should check the tire pressures every two weeks, or at least once a month. And don’t forget the spare! The air pressure for the spare tire should be adjusted according to the conditions in the table on page 321. Incorrect tire pressure may waste fuel, reduce the comfort of driving, reduce tire life and make your vehicle less safe to drive. If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Lexus dealer. 324 CHASSIS CAUTION The following instructions for checking tire pressure should be observed: Keep your tire pressure properly. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and cause an accident resulting in death or serious injuries. D The pressure should be checked only when the tires are cold. If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for more than 1.5 km or 1 mile since, you will get an accurate cold tire pressure reading. Low tire pressure (underinflation) — D Excessive wear D Uneven wear D Poor handling D Possibility of blowouts from overheated tire D Poor sealing of the tire bead D Wheel deformation and/or tire separation High tire pressure (overinflation) — D Poor handling D Excessive wear at the center of the tire tread D A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards D Always use a tire pressure gauge. The appearance of the tire can be misleading. Besides, tire pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling. D Do not bleed or reduce tire pressure after driving. It is normal for the tire pressure to be higher after driving. D Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. The passengers and luggage weight should be located so that the vehicle is balanced. D Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps. Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If the caps have been lost, have new ones put on as soon as possible. 325 CHASSIS ROTATING TIRES CHECKING AND REPLACING TIRES When to replace your tires To equalize tire wear and help extend tire life, Lexus recommends that you rotate your tires according to the maintenance schedule. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner ’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.) However, the most appropriate timing for tire rotation may vary according to your driving habits and road surface conditions. The wheel assemblies must be rotated as illustrated above. When rotating tires, check for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, out−of balance wheels, or severe braking. Before storing radial, snow or studded tires, mark the direction of rotation and be sure to install them in the same direction when using them again. Tires should be stored in a cool dry place. 326 " 1 New tread 2 Tread wear indicator 3 Worn tread Replace the tires when the tread wear indicators show. The location of the tread wear indicators is shown by the marks such as “TWI” or “∆” marks molded on the sidewall of each tire. The tires on your Lexus have built−in tread wear indicators to help you know when the tires need replacement. When the tread depth wears to 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indicators will appear. If you can see the indicators in two or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced. The effectiveness of snow tires is lost if the tread wears down below 4 mm (0.16 in.). CHASSIS If you have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, or bulges indicating internal damage, the tire should be replaced. If a tire often goes flat or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage, it should be replaced. If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer. If an air loss occurs while driving, do not continue driving with a deflated tire. Driving even a short distance can damage a tire beyond repair. Any tires which are over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if damage is not obvious. Tires deteriorate with age even if they have never or seldom been used. This also applies to the spare tire and tires stored for future use. Uniform tire quality grading This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading. Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information. DOT quality grades − All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A Treadwear − The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 − 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction AA, A, B, C − The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. 327 CHASSIS Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction. Temperature A, B, C − The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. 328 Tire selection When replacing a tire, use only the same size and construction as originally installed and with the same or greater load capacity. Using any other size or type of tire may seriously affect handling, ride, speedometer/odometer calibration, ground clearance, and clearance between the body and tires or snow chains. CAUTION Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries. D Do not mix radial, bias belted, or bias−ply tires on your vehicle, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control. D Do not use tires other than the manufacturer’s recommended size, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control. CHASSIS INSTALLING SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS When to use snow tires or chains Snow tires or chains are recommended when driving on snow or ice. On wet or dry roads, conventional or radial tires provide better traction than snow or studded tires. Snow tire selection If you need snow tires, select the same size, construction and load capacity as the original tires on your Lexus. Do not use tires other than stated above. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. CAUTION Do not use snow tires other than the manufacturer’s recommended size, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control. Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries. Snow tire installation Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. Installing snow tires on the front wheels only can lead to an excessive difference in road grip capability between the front and rear tires which could cause loss of vehicle control. CAUTION D Snow tires should be inflated to the same pressure as the original tires. D Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph) with any type of snow tires. Tire chain selection Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location or type of road. Always check the local regulations before installing chains. Use SAE Class “S” type radial tire chains, with the exception of radial cable chains or V−bar type chains. Chain installation Install the chains on the front tires as tightly as possible. Do not use tire chains on the rear tires. Retighten chains after driving 0.5 − 1.0 km (1/4 − 1/2 mile). When installing chains on your tires, carefully follow the instructions of the chain manufacturer. 329 CHASSIS CAUTION D Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or the chain manufacturer’s recommended speed limit, whichever is lower. D Drive carefully avoiding bumps, holes, and sharp turns, which may cause the vehicle to bounce. D Avoid sharp turns or locked−wheel braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle handling. D When driving with chains installed, be sure to drive carefully. Slow down before entering the curves to avoid losing control of the vehicle. Otherwise an accident may occur. 330 REPLACING WHEELS When to replace your wheels If you have wheel damage such as bending, cracks or heavy corrosion, the wheel should be replaced. If you fail to replace damaged wheels, a tire may slip off a wheel or cause loss of handling control. Replacement with used wheels is not recommended as they may have been subjected to rough treatment or high mileage and could fail without warning. Also, bent wheels which have been straightened may have hidden structural damage and therefore should not be used. Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. CHASSIS Wheel selection ALUMINUM WHEEL PRECAUTIONS When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width, and offset. D When installing aluminum wheels, check that the wheel nuts are tight after driving your vehicle the first 1600 km (1000 miles). Correct replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer. D If you have rotated, repaired, or changed your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1600 km (1000 miles). A wheel of a different size or type may adversely affect handling, wheel and bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odometer calibration, stopping ability, headlight aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or snow chain clearance to the body and chassis. D When using tire chains, be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels. D Use only the Lexus wheel nuts and wrench designed for your aluminum wheels. CAUTION D When balancing your wheels, use only Lexus balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer. Do not use wheels other than the manufacturer’s recommended size, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control. Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries. D As with any wheel, periodically check your aluminum wheels for damage. If damaged, replace immediately. 331 CHASSIS SUSPENSION AND CHASSIS CAUTION Do not modify the suspension/chassis with lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. It can cause dangerous handling characteristics, resulting in loss of control. 332 CHASSIS 333 SECTION 6–4 SERVICE PROCEDURES AND SPECIFICATIONS Electrical components Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking battery condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery recharging precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing the blade type fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the cartridge type fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the headlight aim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 335 341 344 344 347 348 349 350 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS SPECIFICATIONS − FUSES − FUSE LOCATIONS 64E119 1 Engine compartment 64E092 " 1 2 Engine compartment 3 Driver’s side instrument panel 335 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 64E101 2 Engine compartment 64E102 3 Driver’s side instrument panel 336 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS No. FUSE AMPERE 1 ABS NO.4 7.5 Anti−lock brake system, vehicle skid control system, traction control system, brake assist system 25 Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system 25 Multiplex communication system (power door lock system, auto−door locking system, wireless remote control system) 2 3 4 5 A/F DOOR1 TEL AM2 CIRCUIT 5 No circuit 30 All components in “IGN” and “IG2” fuses and starting system 6 EFI 20 Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system 7 ALT−S 5 Charging system 8 HEAD LH UPR 10 Left−hand headlight (high beam) No. FUSE AMPERE CIRCUIT 9 ETCS 10 Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system 10 HORN 10 Horns 11 IGN 15 Starting system 12 HEAD RH UPR 10 Right−hand headlight (high beam) 13 HAZ 15 Emergency flashers 14 D.C.C 30 All components in “ECU−B”, “RAD NO.1” and “DOME” fuses 15 IG2 10 Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, SRS airbag system, front seat belt pretensioners, cruise control system 16 ST 5 Starting system 17 ADJ PDL 30 Power adjustable pedals 18 CDS 30 Electric cooling fan 337 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS No. FUSE AMPERE 19 ABS NO.2 40 Anti−lock brake system, vehicle skid control system, traction control system, brake assist system 20 MAIN 40 All components in “HEAD LH LWR”, “HEAD RH LWR”, “HEAD LH UPR”, “HEAD RH UPR” and “DRL” fuses 21 ABS NO.3 40 Anti−lock brake system, vehicle skid control system, traction control system, brake assist system 22 HTR 50 Air conditioning system 23 RDI 30 Electric cooling fan 24 SPARE 5 Spare fuse 25 26 338 SPARE ABS NO.1 CIRCUIT 10 Spare fuse 60 All components in “RDI FAN”, “ABS NO.2”, “ABS NO.3”, “CDS”, “HTR (50 A)” and “ADJ PDL” fuses and anti−lock brake system, vehicle skid control system, traction control system, brake assist system No. FUSE AMPERE CIRCUIT 27 ALT 120 All components in “DEF”, “PWR NO.1”, “PWR NO.2”, “PWR NO.3”, “PWR NO.4”, “STOP”, “DOOR NO.2”, “OBD”, “PWR SEAT”, “FUEL OPEN”, “FOG”, “AMP”, “PANEL”, “TAIL”, “AM1”, “CIG”, “POWER POINT”, “RAD NO.2”, “ECU−ACC”, “GAUGE1”, “GAUGE2”, “ECU−IG”, “WIPER”, “WASHER”, “HTR (10 A)”, “SEAT HTR” and “SUN−SHADE” fuses 28 SPARE 15 Spare fuse 29 A/C 10 Air conditioning system 30 DRL 5 Daytime running light system 31 HEAD RH LWR 15 Right−hand headlight (low beam) 32 HEAD LH LWR 15 Left−hand headlight (low beam) and front fog lights ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS No. 33 34 35 36 FUSE ECU−B DOME CIG ECU− ACC AMPERE CIRCUIT 10 Multiplex communication system (power door lock system, security system, auto−door locking system, automatic light control system, headlight delay off system, tail light auto cut system, illuminated entry system, daytime running light system, wireless remote control system) air conditioning system, electronic modulated suspension, driving position memory system 7.5 Ignition switch light, interior light, personal lights, foot lights, door courtesy lights, trunk light, vanity lights, garage door opener, clock, outside temperature gauge, multi−information display 15 Cigarette lighter 5 Power rear view mirrors, clock, multi−information display, driving position memory system No. FUSE AMPERE CIRCUIT 37 RAD NO.2 10 38 POWER POINT 15 39 RAD NO.1 20 Car audio system, navigation system 40 GAUGE1 10 Gauges and meters, clock, outside temperature gauge, multi−information display, shift lock system Car audio system, navigation system Power outlet 41 ECU−IG 10 SRS airbag system, power windows, anti−lock brake system, electronic modulated suspension, driving position memory system 42 WIPER 25 Windshield wipers 43 HTR 10 Air conditioning system 44 MIR HTR 10 Outside rear view mirror heaters 339 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS No. AMPERE CIRCUIT No. FUSE AMPERE 52 PWR NO.2 20 Front passenger’s door lock system, front passenger’s power window Rear sunshade 53 OBD 7.5 On−board diagnosis system Auto anti−glare inside rear view mirror, compass, back−up lights, automatic light control system, automatic headlight leveling system, cruise control system, seat belt reminder lights 54 SEAT HTR 20 55 WASHER 15 56 FAN RLY 10 Glove box light, console box light, clock, outside temperature gauge, multi−information display, instrument cluster lights, instrument panel lights, overdrive−off indicator light 57 STOP 15 58 FUEL OPEN 5 59 DOOR NO.2 25 Multiplex communication system (power door lock system, auto−door locking system, wireless remote control system) 60 AMP 25 Car audio system 61 PWR NO.3 20 Rear passenger’s power window (right side) 45 AM1 5 Starting system 46 FOG 15 Front fog lights 47 SUN− SHADE 15 48 49 340 FUSE GAUGE2 PANEL 10 10 50 TAIL 10 Tail lights, parking lights, license plate lights 51 PWR NO.4 20 Rear passenger’s power window (left side) CIRCUIT Seat heaters Windshield washer Electric cooling fans Stop lights, high mounted stoplight Fuel filler door opener ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS No. FUSE AMPERE CIRCUIT 62 PWR SEAT 30 Power seats, driving position memory system 63 PWR NO.1 30 Driver’s door lock system, driver’s power window, electric moon roof 64 DEF 40 Rear window defogger CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION Precautions CAUTION BATTERY PRECAUTIONS The battery produces flammable and explosive hydrogen gas. D Do not cause a spark by contacting the battery terminals with tools. D Do not smoke or light a match near the battery. The electrolyte contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid. D Avoid contact with eyes, skin or clothes. D Never inhale or swallow electrolyte. D Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery. D Keep children away from the battery. EMERGENCY MEASURES D If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the medical office. 341 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS D If electrolyte gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the contacted area. If you feel a pain or burn, get medical attention immediately. Checking battery exterior D If electrolyte gets on your clothes, there is a possibility of its soaking through to your skin, so immediately take off the exposed clothing and follow the procedure above, if necessary. D If you accidentally swallow electrolyte, drink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Then go immediately for emergency help. D Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. " 1 Terminals 2 Hold−down clamp Check the battery for corroded or loose connections, cracks, or loose hold−down clamps. 1. If the battery is corroded, wash it off with a solution of warm water and baking soda. Coat the terminals with grease to prevent further corrosion. 2. If the connections are loose, tighten the clamp bolts − but do not overtighten. 3. Tighten the hold−down clamp only enough to keep the battery firmly in place. Overtightening may damage the battery case. 342 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS NOTICE Checking battery condition Checking by indicator D Make sure the engine and all accessories are turned off before performing maintenance. D When checking the battery, remove the ground cable first and reinstall it last. D Be careful not to cause a short circuit with tools. D Take care no solution gets into the battery when washing it. If the battery is disconnected or run down The moon roof may not operate automatically and the jam protection function will not function correctly after you reconnect, replace or recharge the battery. In any of these cases, you should normalize the moon roof. To normalize the moon roof, see page 92. Check the battery condition by the indicator color. 1 BLUE − Good condition 2 WHITE − Charging necessary. Have the battery checked by your Lexus dealer. 3 RED − Have the battery checked by your Lexus dealer. NOTICE Do not refill the battery with water. 343 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS BATTERY RECHARGING PRECAUTIONS CHECKING AND REPLACING THE BLADE TYPE FUSES During recharging, the battery is producing hydrogen gas. Therefore, before recharging: 1. If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable. 2. Make sure the power switch on the recharger is off when connecting the charger cables to the battery and when disconnecting them. CAUTION "Engine compartment D Always charge the battery in an unconfined area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation. D Only do a slow charge (5 A or less). Charging at a quicker rate is dangerous. The battery may explode causing personal injuries. NOTICE Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off. "Engine compartment 344 1 Pull−out tool 2 Spare fuses ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS "Driver’s side instrument panel 1. Turn the ignition switch off and remove the auxiliary box. 2. Make sure the inoperative component is turned off. Pull the suspected fuse straight out with the pull−out tool and check it. If it has blown, push a new fuse into the clips. Determine which fuse may be causing the problem. The auxiliary box shows the name of the circuit for each fuse. 345 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS It is a good idea to purchase a set of spare fuses and keep them in your vehicle for emergencies. If the new fuse immediately blows out, there is a problem with the electrical system. Have your Lexus dealer correct it as soon as possible. CAUTION "Good "Blown a. Look carefully at the fuse. If the thin wire is broken, the fuse has blown. If you are not sure or if it is too dark to see, try replacing the suspected fuse with one of the same value that you know is good. b. Only install a fuse with the amperage rating designated on the fuse box lid. If you do not have a spare fuse, in an emergency you can pull out the “RAD NO.1”, “RAD NO.2” or “POWER POINT” fuse, which may be dispensable for normal driving, and use it if its amperage rating is the same. If you cannot use one of the same amperage, use one lower than, but as close as possible to, the amperage. If the amperage is lower than that specified, the fuse might blow out again but this does not indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get the correct fuse as soon as possible and return the substitute to its original clips. 346 Never use a fuse with a higher amperage rating, or any other object, in place of a fuse. This may cause extensive damage and possibly a fire. ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS CHECKING THE CARTRIDGE TYPE FUSES "Engine compartment If the headlights or other electrical components do not work and the blade type fuses are O.K., check the cartridge type fuses. If any of the cartridge type fuses are blown, they must be replaced. If there is an overload in the circuits from the battery, the fuses are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is damaged. CAUTION Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent for replacement. Never install an ordinary wire − even for a temporary fix. This may cause extensive damage and possibly a fire. "Driver’s side instrument panel 347 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS NOTICE ADDING WASHER FLUID Before replacing the fuses, have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus dealer. If the washer tank becomes nearly empty, add washer fluid. You may use plain water as washer fluid. However, in cold areas where temperatures range below the freezing point, use washer fluid containing antifreeze. This product is available at your Lexus dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow the manufacturer’s directions for how much to mix with water. NOTICE D Do not use engine antifreeze or any other substitute because it may damage your vehicle’s paint. D Do not fill washer fluid over the “NORMAL” level. 348 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS CHECKING THE HEADLIGHT AIM (vehicles with discharge headlight) " 1 Vertical movement adjusting bolt 1 2 Vertical movement adjusting bolt 2 Adjusting the vertical aiming 1. Turn the vertical movement adjusting bolt 1 in either direction using a Phillips−head screwdriver. At this time, keep the turning direction and number of turns in mind. Before checking the headlight aim: 1. Be sure that the body around the headlight is not deformed. 2. Park the vehicle on a level spot. 3. The driver gets into the driver’s seat and puts the vehicle in a state readying for a driving (with a full tank). 4. Bounce the vehicle several times. 349 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS REPLACING LIGHT BULBS The illustration on the following pages show the locations of light bulbs. If it is necessary to replace a bulb, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Use bulbs with the bulb numbers and wattage ratings given in the table. CAUTION D To prevent burning yourself, do not replace the light bulbs while they are hot. 2. Turn the vertical movement adjusting bolt 2 the same number of turns and in the same direction at step 1 using a Phillips−head screwdriver. D Vehicles with discharge headlight—Do not disassemble, repair or take apart the low beam headlight bulbs, connector, power supply circuits and rotated components. Or you may be injured by electric shocks. Call your dealer when the headlights fail to work or have to be replaced or disposed of. D Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and require special handling. They can burst or shatter if scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb only by its plastic or metal case. Do not touch the glass part of a bulb with bare hands. NOTICE Only use a bulb of the listed type. 350 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS The inside of the lens of exterior lights such as headlights may temporarily fog up when the lens becomes wet in the rain or in a car wash. This is not a problem because the fogging is caused by the temperature difference between the outside and inside of the lens, just like the windshield fogged up in the rain. However, if there is a large drop of water on the inside of the lens, or if there is water pooled inside the light, contact your Lexus dealer. LIGHT LOCATION Light Bulbs Bulb No. W Type 1 Headlights (high beam) 9005 60 A 2 Headlights (low beam) Discharge bulb Halogen bulb −−− −−− 35 55 B C Parking lights Front side marker lights Fog lights Front turn signal lights −−− 194 −−− −−− 5 3.8 55 21 E E D E 3 4 5 6 351 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS Light Bulbs 352 Bulb No. W Type Light Bulbs Bulb No. W Type 7 High mounted stoplight 7440 21 E 14 Vanity lights −−− 5 G 8 Rear turn signal lights −−− 21 E 15 Interior light −−− 8 G 9 Rear side marker lights −−− 5 E 16 Door courtesy lights 168 5 E 10 Stop/tail lights 7443 21/5 E 17 Glove box light −−− 1.4 E 11 Back−up lights 921 18 E 18 Personal lights −−− 8 F 12 License plate lights −−− 5 E 13 Tail lights 168 5 E ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS Light Bulbs 19 Trunk light Bulb No. W Type −−− 3 G A: HB3 halogen bulbs B: D2R discharge bulbs C: H7 halogen bulbs D: H3 halogen bulbs E: Wedge base bulbs F: Single end bulbs G: Double end bulbs 353 SECTION 6–5 SERVICE PROCEDURES AND SPECIFICATIONS Body Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protecting your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Washing and waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 355 356 357 359 BODY SPECIFICATIONS − DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT Overall length 4855 mm (191.1 in.) Overall width 1810 mm (71.3 in.) Overall height 1455 mm (57.3 in.)* Wheelbase 2720 mm (107.1 in.) Tread − Front − Rear Vehicle capacity weight (occupants + luggage) 1545 mm (60.8 in.) 1535 mm (60.4 in.) 410 kg (900 lb.) *: Unladen vehicle − FUEL TANK Capacity 70 L (18.5 gal., 15.4 lmp. gal.) 355 BODY PROTECTING YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION Proper care of your Lexus can help ensure long−term corrosion prevention. The most common causes of corrosion to your vehicle are: D The accumulation of road salt, dirt and moisture in hard−to−reach areas under the vehicle. D Chipping of paint or undercoating caused by minor accidents or by stones and gravel. The following conditions will cause or accelerate corrosion of your vehicle, so it is important to keep your vehicle, particularly the underside, as clean as possible and to repair any damage to paint or protective coatings as soon as possible. D The presence of road salt or dust control chemicals, salt in the air near the sea coast, industrial air pollution. D High humidity, especially at temperatures just above freezing point. D Certain parts of your vehicle are wet or damp for an extended period of time, even though other parts of the vehicle are dry. D Components of the vehicle which are prevented from quick−drying due to lack of proper ventilation are exposed to high temperature. 356 To help prevent corrosion on your Lexus, follow these guidelines: Keep your vehicle clean by regular washing. In addition, observe the following points. D If you drive on salted roads in the winter or if you live near the ocean, you should hose off the undercarriage at least once a month to minimize corrosion. D High pressure water or steam is effective for cleaning the vehicle’s underside and wheel housings. Pay particular attention to these areas as it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It will do more harm than good to simply wet the mud and debris without removing them. The lower edge of doors, rocker panels and frame members have drain holes which should not be allowed to clog with dirt as trapped water in these areas can cause corrosion. D Wash the underside of the vehicle thoroughly when winter is over. See “Washing and waxing” on page 357 for more tips. Check the condition of your vehicle’s paint and trim. If you find any chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately to prevent corrosion from starting. If the chips or scratches have gone through the bare metal, have a qualified body shop make the repair. BODY Check the interior of your vehicle. Water and dirt can accumulate under the floor mats and could cause corrosion. Occasionally check under the mats to make sure the area is dry. Be particularly careful when transporting chemicals, cleansers, fertilizers, salt, etc. These should be transported in proper containers. If a spill or leak should occur, immediately clean and dry the area. Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated garage or a roofed place. Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. If you wash your vehicle in the garage, or if you drive it in covered with water or snow, your garage may be so damp it will cause corrosion. Even if your garage is heated, a wet vehicle can corrode if the ventilation is poor. WASHING AND WAXING Washing your Lexus Keep your vehicle clean by regular washing. The following cases may cause weakness to the paint or corrosion to the body and parts. Wash your vehicle as soon as possible. D When driving in a coastal area D When driving on a road sprinkled with antifreeze D When having coal tar, tree sap, bird droppings and carcass of an insect D When driving in the areas where there is a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust and chemical substance D When the vehicle becomes remarkably dirty with dust and mud Hand−washing your Lexus Work in the shade and wait until the vehicle body is not hot to the touch. 1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Remove any mud or road salt from the underside of the vehicle or in the wheel wells. 2. Wash with a mild car−wash soap, mixed according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and keep it wet by dipping it frequently into the wash water. Do not rub hard − let the soap and water remove the dirt. 357 BODY Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic wheel ornaments are damaged easily by organic substances. If any organic substances splashes an ornament, be sure to wash it off with water and check if the ornament is damaged. 4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle using a clean soft cotton towel. Do not rub or press hard − you might scratch the paint. Automatic car wash CAUTION Do not attach the heavily damaged plastic wheel ornament. It may fly off the wheel and cause accidents while the vehicle is moving. Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent. Urethane bumpers and side moldings: Wash carefully. Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper and side molding faces are soft. Road tar: Remove with turpentine or cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces. NOTICE Do not use organic substances (gasoline, kerosene, benzine or strong solvents), which may be toxic or cause damage. 3. Rinse thoroughly − dried soap can cause streaking. In hot weather you may need to rinse each section right after you wash it. 358 Your vehicle may be washed in an automatic car wash, but remember that the paint can be scratched by some type of brushes, unfiltered washing water, or the washing process itself. Scratching reduces paint durability and gloss, especially on darker colors. The manager of the car wash should be able to advise you whether the process is safe for the paint on your vehicle. Waxing your Lexus Polishing and waxing is recommended to maintain the original beauty of your Lexus’ finish. Once a month or if the vehicle surface does not repel water well, apply wax. 1. Always wash and dry the vehicle before you begin waxing, even if you are using a combined cleaner and wax. 2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If the finish has become extremely weathered, use a car−cleaning polish, followed by a separate wax. Carefully follow the manufacturer ’s instructions and precautions. Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim as well as the paint. 3. Wax the vehicle again when water does not bead but remains on the surface in large patches. BODY Windshield washer nozzles: Make sure that the nozzles do not become blocked when waxing. If a nozzle becomes blocked, contact your Lexus dealer to have the vehicle serviced. NOTICE If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged. CLEANING THE INTERIOR CAUTION D Be careful not to splash water or spill liquid on the floor. This may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, resulting in serious injury. D Do not wash the vehicle floor with water, or allow water to get onto the floor when cleaning the vehicle interior or exterior. Water may get into audio components or other electrical components above or under the floor carpet (or mat) and cause a malfunction; and it may cause body corrosion. Leather Interior The selected leather is used in your Lexus. Due to a leather product, some parts of leather may be rough, uneven or scratched originally. To keep good appearance, we recommend you to clean it periodically twice a year. Remove dirt on the leather in the following ways: 1. Wipe it off lightly using a soft cloth (e.g. gauze) dampened with 5% solution of neutral detergent for wool. 2. Wring water from a clean cloth and thoroughly wipe off all traces of detergent with it. 3. Wipe off the surface of the leather with a dry soft cloth. Allow the leather to dry in a ventilated shaded area. Excess of wet may cause the hardening or shrinking of the leather. 359 BODY NOTICE D Dirt or sand adhered to the leather may damage the treated surface and cause it to wear earlier. Remove dirt or sand using a vacuum cleaner. D If a stain should fail to come out with a neutral detergent, apply a cleaner that does not contain an organic solvent. D Never use organic substances such as benzine, alcohol or gasoline, or alkaline or acid solutions for cleaning the leather as these could cause discoloring. The synthetic leather areas may be easily cleaned with a mild soap or detergent and water. First vacuum over the upholstery to remove loose dirt. Then, using a sponge or soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the synthetic leather. After allowing it to soak in for a few minutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt and wipe off the soap with a clean damp cloth. If all the dirt does not come off, repeat the procedure. Commercial foaming−type cleaners are also available which work well. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions. D Use of a nylon brush or synthetic fiber cloth, etc. may scratch the fine grained surface of the leather. NOTICE D Mildew may develop on soiled leather upholstery. Be especially careful to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your upholstery always clean. Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline or window cleaner on the interior. D Long exposure to direct sunlight may cause the leather surface to harden and shrink. Keep your vehicle in a shaded area, especially in the summer. D The interior of your vehicle is apt to heat up on hot summer days, so avoid placing on the upholstery items made of vinyl or plastic or containing wax as these tend to stick to leather when warm. D Improper cleaning of the leather upholstery could result in discoloration or staining. 360 Synthetic Leather Areas (Dash) Carpets, Windows and Seat Belts Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove as much dirt as possible. Several types of foam cleaners are available; some are in aerosol cans and others are powders or liquids which you mix with water to produce a foam. To shampoo the carpets, use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water − the best results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible. Read the shampoo instructions and follow them closely. BODY The seat belts may be cleaned with mild soap and water or with lukewarm water. Use a cloth or sponge. As you are cleaning, check the belts for excessive wear, fraying or cuts. NOTICE Air Conditioning Control Panel, Car Audio, Instrument Panel, Console Panel, and Switches Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning. Soak a clean soft cloth in water or lukewarm water then lightly wipe off any dirt. D Use a good foam−type shampoo to clean the carpets. D Do not use dye or bleach on the belts − it may weaken them. NOTICE D The windows may be cleaned with any household window cleaner. D Do not use organic substances (solvents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions. These chemicals can cause discoloring, staining or peeling of the surface. D Do not apply detergent to or wet the automatic wiper control sensor when cleaning the inside of the windshield. D If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make sure their ingredients do not include the substances mentioned above. D When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or connectors. D If you use a liquid car freshener, do not spill the liquid onto the vehicle’s interior surfaces. It may contain the ingredients mentioned above. Immediately clean any spill using the method mentioned above. D Do not use the belts until they become dry. If you have any questions about the cleaning of your Lexus, your local Lexus dealer will be pleased to answer them. 361 SECTION 7 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S. OWNERS Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 362 KEYS AND DOORS REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S. OWNERS If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll−free: 1−800−25−LEXUS). If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll−free at 1−800−424−9393 (or 366−0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. 363